JP6810094B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing a game.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device and the game medium wins a prize (also referred to as "starting prize") in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, it is predetermined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as "variable") the identification information when the game medium wins a prize in a specific winning area (also referred to as "starting area") is provided, and the variable display device can be used for identification. Some are configured so that when the display result of the variable display of information becomes a specific display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player.

The advantageous state means a state that is advantageous to the player who has been given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the game medium is likely to win a prize in the state of the special variable winning means (big hit game state), or a state in which the right to become advantageous to the player is generated. , A state in which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state in which the conditions for paying out the prize game medium are easily satisfied.

In such a game machine, the display result of a variable display device that displays a symbol as identification information is usually a combination of a predetermined specific display mode (specific display result), which is called a "big hit". When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to an advantageous state (big hit game state) in which the game medium is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses.

In such a game machine, it is possible to control a predetermined state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player, and the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased from the normal state. Some are configured to be controllable in special states. For example, in Patent Document 1, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and after a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed) is satisfied, the specification is specified. It is described that the control is performed in an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the area.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-20287 (paragraphs 0219, 0258)

However, with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a risk that it is not possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined conditions have been satisfied.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and the first identification information and the first identification information. (2) A variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the other variable display of the second identification information while the variable display of one of the identification information is being executed, and the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. The advantageous state control means that can control the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of either one of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information, and the second. A predetermined state control means that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state based on the fact that the predetermined display result is derived and displayed as the display result of either one of the variable display of the identification information, and the normal state. A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state with a higher frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state, and a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of the second identification information. The notification effect executing means is provided with an executable notification effect executing means, and the notification effect executing means starts the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information from which the specific display result is derived and displayed. It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the notification, and in the normal state, the notification is given when the variable display of the first identification information is not started during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information from which the specific display result is derived and displayed. It is possible to limit the execution of the effect, and further, it is equipped with a warning means that can execute a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in the game, and the warning means is at least in the non-game state and when the advantageous state ends. It is possible to call attention to prevent entanglement, and it is characterized in that the reminder regarding prevention of entanglement is executed in different modes depending on whether it is in a non-gaming state or when an advantageous state ends. According to such a configuration, the notification can be appropriately performed.
(Means 1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and is a variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Variable display execution that can execute the variable display and can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed. Means (for example, a portion in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first. Based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the 1 variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the 2nd identification information, an advantageous state (for example) advantageous to the player is obtained. Advantageous state control means that can be controlled to the jackpot game state (for example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560), variable display of the first identification information, and second identification information. A predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state based on the derivation display of the predetermined display result (for example, the small hit symbol) as the display result of either one of the variable displays. Predetermined state control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a special state (for example, KT state) that is controlled to a predetermined state more frequently than the normal state. ) (For example, a part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied). For example, the notification effect executing means (for example, the part that executes step S5003 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute the jackpot preparation display) is provided, and the notification effect executing means is in the absence of the player in the normal state. When the absence condition corresponding to a certain condition (for example, the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information. Therefore, the notification effect can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is Y, S5001 in step S5000. (S5003 is executed when it is Y of Y and S5002), and the notification effect is executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state. (For example, the effect control microcomputer 200 does not execute S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002), and further, a warning means capable of executing a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in the game. (For example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control that displays the immersive prevention image 90131) is provided, and the alerting means is at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer waiting demonstration state) and when the advantageous state ends (for example, a customer waiting demonstration state) For example, it is possible to call attention to the prevention of entanglement during the ending period (for example) (for example, display the entanglement prevention image 90131), and the entanglement differs depending on the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. A warning about prevention is executed (for example, in the customer waiting demonstration state, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 73 (h), and in the ending period, FIG. 76 As shown in (b), the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909, and as shown in FIG. 71, during the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state. The feature is that the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of sinking.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a specific area through which the game medium can pass (for example, the operating gate 17) and a predetermined condition are satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state. An advantageous state is provided with a promotion notification means (for example, a portion for executing steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing a specific promotion notification (for example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium. The control means can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S2501 and is in step S305. ~ S307, S355 to S357 are executed), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition is not satisfied, the promotion notification means executes the specific promotion notification in the predetermined mode (execution of S307, S355 to S357). (For example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied, the specific promotion notification is performed in a special mode having lower visibility than the predetermined mode. When it is executed (for example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed) and the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in a predetermined mode. (For example, a portion for executing step S4716 in the effect control microcomputer 200) may be provided so as to be able to execute (for example, the first demo display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to play.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) and an effect for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with a control means (for example, a microcomputer 200 for effect control), and the game control means is a first absence information (for example, waiting for a first customer) indicating whether or not an absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information. A transmission means (for example, a second customer waiting demo display designation command) capable of transmitting a demo display designation command) and a second absence information (for example, a second customer waiting demo display designation command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second identification information. , The portion that executes steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560) may be included. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to the means 3, the game is provided with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. The control means includes special state control information (for example, a background specification command) indicating whether or not the device is controlled to a special state, and absence information (for example, a first customer waiting demo display) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied. The effect control means includes a transmission means (for example, a part that executes steps S51A, S51B, S60A, S60B in the game control microcomputer 560) capable of transmitting a designated command and a second customer waiting demo display designation command. An absentee effect executing means capable of executing an absentee effect indicating that the absentee condition is satisfied based on the special state control information and the absentee information (for example, in step S4502 in the effect control microcomputer 200, a background designation command and a customer wait The part where the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the demo display specification command) may be included. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, information indicating whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as a hold storage (for example, a second hold storage). In a hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) and an advantage notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing an advantage notification effect (for example, a big hit effect) indicating control to an advantageous state. (Parts for executing steps S904 to S907), the advantageous notification effect executing means corresponds to a hold memory indicating that the first identification information to be controlled to the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state during execution of the variable display of the first identification information. When the variable display of the second identification information is started, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB, step S65B or later. By not performing the above processing, even if the jackpot random number is stored as the second hold storage, the fluctuation with respect to the second hold storage is forcibly removed, and the effect control microcomputer 200 uses the second identification information. (Do not perform the jackpot production). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5, an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter (for example). A variable starting device that can be changed to a closed state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (for example, a predetermined variable device that is provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and can be changed into an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state). To execute step S26C in the variable starting device control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of controlling the variable starting device by the special variable winning ball device 22) and one of a plurality of opening patterns. As shown in FIGS. 15 (1) and 15 (2), the variable display executing means is provided with a variable starting ball device 15 (a portion that controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state for 5.5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). The variable display of the second identification information can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the device, and the predetermined state control means is either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the display result becoming a predetermined display result (for example, a small hit symbol), it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state, and special state control. As a special state, the means is divided into a first special state (for example, high probability / first KT state) and a second special state (for example, high probability / second KT state) having a different degree of advantage from the first special state. It is controllable, and the variable starting device control means can control the variable starting device by a specific opening pattern in which the game medium is more likely to flow into the predetermined variable device than the non-specific opening pattern among the plurality of opening patterns (for example, FIG. (As shown in 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds), different proportions depending on whether the device is controlled in the first special state or the second special state. The variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern (for example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds as shown in FIG. 15 (1), and in the second KT state, FIG. As shown in 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds). According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game in the case of controlling the special state can be improved.

(Means 7) A gaming machine capable of performing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) in any of means 1 to 6, and is a predetermined route (for example, a flow path) among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. A specific area (for example, an operating gate 17) provided on the right side of the game area 7 and through which the game medium can pass is provided, and the advantageous state control means allows the game medium to pass through the specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 when it is Y in step S2501), and based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. The predetermined promotion notification (for example, the first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the specific area is entered. It is provided with a promotion notification means (for example, a portion for executing steps S4404, S4405, S4604, S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing a specific promotion notification (for example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium. It may be that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

(Means 8) A gaming machine capable of performing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) in any of means 1 to 7, and a specific area through which the game medium can pass (for example, an operating gate 17). ), The advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S2501). In this case, steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), and based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific promotion notification (for example, the second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area is issued. When the promotion notification means (for example, the portion that executes steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200) is provided and the promotion notification means does not satisfy the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, the specific promotion notification is executed in the predetermined mode (for example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and when the absence condition is satisfied, the second 2. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification information, the specific promotion notification may be executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the predetermined mode (for example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

(Means 9) In any of the means 1 to the means 8, the approach advantageous state (for example, the open state) in which the game medium can enter and the approach disadvantageous state (for example, the closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter are changed. A possible variable starting device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. ), And a variable starter control means (for example, a portion for executing step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560) capable of changing and controlling the variable starter to an approach advantageous state or an approach disadvantageous state. , The variable display of the second identification information can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starter, and the information related to the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as hold storage (for example, second hold storage). The special state control means is provided with various hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer), and the special state control means is more advantageous than the first special state (for example, high probability / first KT state) and the first special state as special states. When it is possible to control to a second special state (for example, high probability / second KT state) with a high degree, and the variable starter control means is controlled to an advantageous state, when it is controlled to a first special state. The variable starting device can be changed and controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer specific period (for example, by executing step S26C in the game control microcomputer 560, in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 57. Controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state for 3.8 seconds, and controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state), and the variable display executing means is in the first special state. As the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by, the variable display of the first period can be executed regardless of the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560). Is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G), so that 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories. (It is possible to change the second special symbol over), and the second and subsequent variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state is stored in the hold storage means in the first special state. When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, variable display of the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (for example,). The game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, the second hold is made by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H). If the number of memorized items is 1 or more, it is assumed that the second special symbol can be changed for 1.0 second (the time controlled by the first KT state and shorter than the first change time of 7.0 seconds). May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

(Means 10) In any of means 1 to 9, a special area through which the game medium can pass (for example, the gate 32), an approach advantageous state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state), and the game medium enter. A variable starting device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed into an impossible or difficult approach disadvantageous state (for example, a closed state), and an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device. A predetermined variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to, and a normal variable display that can execute a variable display of normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the passage of a game medium through a special area. Variable starting device control capable of changing the variable starting device to an approach advantageous state based on the execution means (for example, the portion that executes steps S5100 to S5102 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the variable display of the ordinary identification information. The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the variable display executing means executes variable display of the second identification information based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device. It is possible (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S26B), and the predetermined state control means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device into an approach advantageous state. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S358 to S360), and the special state control means has the first special state (for example, high probability / first KT state) and the first special state as special states. It is possible to control the second special state (for example, high probability / second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the state, and the variable starting device control means normally displays the identification information in a variable manner in the first special state. The variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special region can enter the variable starting device (for example, from the time when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15). The shortest required time is 0.6 seconds, and in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32, so that the first KT state is one. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state when the game ball passes through the gate 32, the one game ball can win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (means 11) to (means 23). Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154678, a warning is given to a player to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game during the ending period after the hit game state is completed. There was something to do. In addition, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-8184, there is also a device that calls attention to prevent immersiveness during a customer waiting demonstration state or a variable display. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be lowered by calling attention to the prevention of excessive immersion. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of appropriately issuing a warning regarding prevention of entanglement.

(Means 11) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state or the like) that is advantageous to the player. , A warning means capable of executing a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in a game (for example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control for displaying an immersive prevention image 90131), and the warning means is at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer). It is possible to call attention to prevention of entanglement (for example, display the entanglement prevention image 90131) at the time of the waiting demo state, etc.) and at the end of the advantageous state (for example, the ending period, etc.). Attention regarding prevention of entanglement is executed in different modes depending on the game state and the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the customer waiting demonstration state, as shown in FIG. 73 (h), the effect display device 909 As shown in FIG. 71, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the bottom of the screen, and the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed small at the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 76 (b) during the ending period. In addition, the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably carry out a warning regarding prevention of sinking.

(Means 12) In the means 11, as a warning, the warning means displays a warning display regarding prevention of entanglement, which is partly common between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. It can be displayed on the means (for example, it is possible to display an immersive prevention image having the same content of the displayed characters on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period). The display period of the warning display for preventing entanglement is shorter when the advantageous state ends than when the non-gaming state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 71, after the big hit ends than when the customer waiting demo state ends. The display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter during the ending period of.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the caution display while preventing the game from being deteriorating due to the excessive warning display when the advantageous state ends.

(Means 13) In the means 11, as the warning, the warning means displays a warning regarding prevention of entanglement in a mode that is partially common between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, it is possible to display an immersive prevention image with the same content of the displayed characters on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period). The display area of the warning display for preventing entanglement is smaller when the advantageous state ends than in the non-gaming state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (h) and 76 (b), the customer. The display area of the immersive prevention image is smaller during the ending period after the big hit than in the waiting demo state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the warning display while preventing the interest of the game from being lowered by excessively displaying the warning when the advantageous state ends.

(Means 14) In the means 11, as the warning, the warning means displays a warning regarding prevention of entanglement in a mode that is partially common between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, it is possible to display an immersive prevention image with the same content of the displayed characters on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period). At the end of the advantageous state, the warning display for preventing entanglement is displayed at a position that is less conspicuous to the player than in the non-game state (for example, FIGS. 73 (h) and 76). As shown in (b), the immersive prevention image is displayed in the corner of the screen, which is less noticeable to the player, in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the warning display while preventing the interest of the game from being lowered by excessively displaying the warning when the advantageous state ends.

(Means 15) In any of means 11 to 14,
As a warning, the warning means can display a warning display related to prevention of immersiveness in the same display period as other warning displays, and display each warning display at a different display start timing (for example,). As shown in FIG. 73, the entanglement prevention image 90131 can be displayed in the same period as the other alert display 90130, and the display timing of each alert display is different, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once.

(Means 16) In the means 14, the warning means can display a warning display related to prevention of immersiveness in the same display period as other warning displays as a warning, and each warning display fades in in order. And fade out at a common timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the entanglement prevention image 90131 can be displayed in the same period as the other alert display 90130, and the other alert display 90130 is faded in. After that, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is faded in, and after all the entanglement prevention images 90131 and the other warning display 90130 are available, they are faded out at a common timing, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

(Means 17) In any of means 11 to 16, a display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 77, a plurality of types of music). An effect control microcomputer 90100 or the like that displays a corresponding item) and a selection effect means (as shown in FIG. 77) that can execute a selection effect that selects one of the plurality of items. An effect control microcomputer 90100 or the like that changes the items to be performed, and an effect execution means (as shown in FIG. 77) that can execute an effect corresponding to the item selected in the selected effect means. The display means is in a state where the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is executed in the selected effect. Even if there is, it is possible to display the item corresponding to the first effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is executed, it corresponds to the music A. The item can be displayed by "returning", etc.), when the effect executing means selects an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect while the first effect is being executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is played from the beginning, etc.). When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over and executed (for example, FIG. 77). As shown in (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game even when the selected effect is selected again.

(Means 18) In means 17, at least the selection effect can be executed during the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 77, the selection effect for selecting an item is executed during the jackpot state. It is possible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in the advantageous state even when the selected effect is selected again.

(Means 19) In means 18, the selection effect is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the player at the start of a big hit. The selection effect at the start of the round, etc., which is executed regardless of the operation of, and the second selection effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (d)), which is executed based on the operation of the player after the first selection effect. , Selection effect, etc. executed based on the operation of the player at the start of the third round).

According to such a configuration, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the advantageous state, the selection effect can be executed according to the preference of the player.

(Means 20) In means 19, the second selection effect has a longer period in which the effect can be executed than the first selection effect (as shown in FIG. 77, the first selection effect at the start of the round is 1). It is set from the start of the round to the end of the 2nd round, and the second selection effect at the start of the 3rd round is set from the start of the 3rd round to the final round, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to deal with various types of players by lengthening the executable period of the second selection effect to be executed based on the player's operation.

(Means 21) In either the means 19 or the means 20, the effect executing means can reproduce a musical piece as the plurality of types of effects (as shown in FIG. 77, the musical piece can be reproduced, etc.). In the first selection effect, when an item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the item (for example, as shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B). In addition, in the selection effect at the start of the round, when the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item, etc.), and in the second selection effect, Even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is not changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (e) and 77 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round. , Even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the played music does not change, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 22) In any of means 19 to 21, when the first selection effect is performing the display of items corresponding to the currently being executed in the second selection effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed song is displayed at the start of the round. Display with "Back", which is different from the display of "A" in the selection effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to show the player in an easy-to-understand manner which effect is currently being executed.

(Means 23) In any of the means 19 to the means 22, a hold storage means (for example, RAM 9055 of the game control microcomputer 90560) for storing information related to the variation display as hold information (for example, hold storage, etc.) and a hold. With a determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560 or the like) that can determine whether or not the advantageous state is controlled after the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information before the execution of the variation display corresponding to the pending information. In the advantageous state, when the hold information determined to be controlled in the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the hold information is controlled to the advantageous state. The notification effect means (for example, the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) capable of executing the notification effect (for example, the hold continuous effect) for notifying in advance is further provided, and the notification effect means is a plurality of the above-mentioned advantageous states. The notification effect can be executed at any of the timings (for example, the hold continuous effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the round), and as one of the plurality of timings, In the first selection effect, the notification effect can be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items (for example, as one of the plurality of timings, at the start of the round. Hold continuous production can be executed at the timing when any of the multiple items is selected).

According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised in the first-selection effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the second selection effect, the notification effect may be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external output signal which a game machine outputs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the external output signal output by a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating various displays during a customer waiting demonstration state and after a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating various displays in a customer waiting demo state and power saving mode. It is a figure which shows the screen in the customer waiting demo state. It is a figure which shows the screen during the menu operation. It is a figure which shows the screen in the power saving mode. It is a figure which shows the screen after the end of a big hit. It is a production drawing which shows the production which is executed during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the music selection process at the time of a big hit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. There is a display unit 9c). Note that it is easy to visually recognize the displayed contents, for example, while the size of the display area is large and the displayed contents in the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has 2 Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed in the two variable display units is executed, whether the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. It is difficult to grasp (whether or not). In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative pattern are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, an indicator of another aspect may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 17 is detected by the actuating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom surface forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 22 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used for special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided in the special winning opening 24. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) another prize opening such as the first start winning opening 13a or the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the special winning opening 24 cannot pass (enter) the game ball to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 14, a second starting opening switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches the game (so-called right side) during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. Perform the striking operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the gate 32, and the game ball is the gate 32 in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through to the variable winning ball device 15 being controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball is released. It is possible to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display unit 9a. It will be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second decorative symbol is started on the second variable display unit 9b. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the large winning opening. One round in the jackpot game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or after a certain period of time has passed since the special variable winning ball device 20 was opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. There are very few cases in which a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, if the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, "synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right is allowed to flow down to the left, and the accommodating hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in this state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 23, A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, and a downstream flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the end portion of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is determined when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) on which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. The control related to the voice control and the lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command, and is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in (probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. .. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10 is the jackpot determination value.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). The big hit determination random number value is any one shown in FIG. If it matches the jackpot judgment value, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, all the hits are unconditionally made a small hit (however, as will be described later, it is a forced loss after the fact In some cases).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a 20% probability, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state shifts to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit", it is not in the second KT state. It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probability change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state shifts to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probability change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B and S2010-S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Eighteen types from # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain prize ball can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In this embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Pattern # 03 (variable pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 05 to # 07, # 30 It is decided to be one of. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortened fluctuation. Alternatively, the second fluctuation pattern # 030 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second, may be determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. In this embodiment, when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 07, the effect display device 9 In the variable display of the background symbol in the above, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays a character such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 08 is determined to be accompanied by. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 10 to # 12. Will be done.

As in the case of the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second start winning is also made when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state. The variation pattern for preparing to open the mouth (second variation pattern # 10) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

Further, if the second and subsequent fluctuations are displayed after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 31 It is decided to be either.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuations occur. The second fluctuation pattern # 13 with a shortened fluctuation with a short time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 031 with a shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 31 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state. ..

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 16 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the fluctuation display is executed, may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. It may be determined by pattern # 17. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when a variable pattern including a continuous effect or a battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuous effect or the battle effect in the variable display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the symbol is not changed. Since it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 when it is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 second. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 2.6 seconds, has passed, and the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the symbol is not changed. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is longer than the time when the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 before it is played. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. Whether or not to hit the normal figure is determined by different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a normal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 15 in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 15 (1) is provided. A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 is not opened by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 provided on the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, it means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), the value of the first hold storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first hold storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send the background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S64AA, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S64AA, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used is determined (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and changes. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the processes of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 28, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011) to see if it becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state ( Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 controls to start the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 (see FIGS. 32 and 33) if they have not yet been output (step S2015X).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, with respect to the external outputs of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2, even before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 and the jackpot game is started. , The external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification for urging the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operating gate 17 can be executed.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or low volume). The screen display) may be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. Therefore, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is performed. May be good. Further, at the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening 14 and the special winning opening 14 and the special winning opening In 24, when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls smaller than a predetermined number is detected, a left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17, while the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to do so.

In the present embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning opening 14 or the second start winning opening 14 or When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

In this embodiment, since the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is executed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, for example, the low probability / first KT state is terminated before the amusement store is closed. If the hold memory of the second special symbol remains afterwards, the second special symbol will fluctuate for a long time (5 minutes) in a situation where the player has finished the game due to the closing of the game store. Since the jackpot symbol can be output externally when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the display, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1 between the closing of the game store and the next opening of the store. At this time, the clerk will open the store after performing initialization (RAM clear).

In addition, not only before the amusement store is closed, but also when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, and the second special There is a case where the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a long time (5 minutes) fluctuation display of the symbol), but even in such a case, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the game ball has passed through and detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, so that the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of Round 1 will be measured. Further, in the case of round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in the processing during opening of the large winning opening is measured, so that after each round ( The interval period (except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separated. It may be configured to measure the time using the timer of.

Next, when the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds in the EXT data of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening when the timer before opening the large winning opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411). , Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening in the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced to be missed), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the second large winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening processing (step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 25a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S350 means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

If the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S164B), and decides to make the small hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be a small hit (forced loss). (Except for cases), but not limited to such aspects. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine whether or not to make a small hit. In this case, although the lottery process is executed, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a 100% probability, or it may be configured to determine a deviation with a low probability.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and determines the big hit type. Based on this, control is performed to send one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200. ..

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second large winning opening pre-opening process (step S355) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. 26. That is, in the first large winning opening pre-opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is read as "second", the second large winning opening pre-opening process is explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S2208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the process during special symbol change is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol change processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 200, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. The time timer may be configured to be subtracted by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the external output signal output by the game machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is in the information output process (step S29), the process of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop process, and the second special symbol stop process. By executing the same process as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via the external output terminal plate provided in the game machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the game machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal plate. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game. Further, a jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the period of all jackpot games, during the probability variation state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state and the second KT state). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal output externally based on the detection of winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. Further, a signal for the planned number of prize balls is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal plate. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

In the example shown in FIG. 32, a case where a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally without distinguishing between the first KT state and the second KT state is shown. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to output different special winning opening winning signals depending on whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the external output signal output by the game machine 1. In the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the special winning port signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning port signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. .. The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. Further, the special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

In addition, in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a signal dedicated to the small hit which is continuously output to the outside during the period of the small hit game may be provided.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the gate The switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passing process (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 56 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 10 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if so, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "5") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5102A): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). Ordinary symbol In the normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the number of gate passing memories is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol hits.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit judgment value to be compared with a normal symbol hit judgment random number (random 4) is set, and is in a normal state. There is a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning is 1/10 in the normal state and 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of hitting a normal symbol differs between the normal state and the KT state, the KT state is more likely to generate a start prize to the second start winning opening 14 than the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be the same in the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), the normal symbol determination table for KT is selected (Y, S5123B in steps S5123A), and if it is in the normal state. Normally, the normal symbol determination table is selected (unless the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set) (N, S5123C in step S5123A).

Then, in step S5124, if it is in the KT state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random number value read in step S5122 is within the range of [3 to 12], and in the normal state. If there is, it is determined whether or not the random value for determination of hitting the normal symbol read in step S5122 is [3]. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

Further, in step S5124, if the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range, the CPU 56 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step S5126), and proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5130B in step S5130). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5130C in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. Set the value (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (hits in step S5124). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5124, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). Further, when the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5102A) (step S5164).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be set to 2 in the first KT state, whereas 1 is set as the number of times of opening of 15. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, it is possible to facilitate the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 shown above and the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer becomes 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends as it is.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped to close the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, a background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S708). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process when the confirmation command is received (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, the first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7, and the second instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operating gate 17. Instruction notification is provided. The first instruction notification includes the first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "right-handed" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and "right-handed" on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. A second reduction instruction notification that displays an image containing the characters "" is provided, and as a second instruction notification, an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" are provided in a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected by 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S3805).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S635). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S640).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S641), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 15 (1 prize to the large prize opening), respectively. (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S651).

The first prize ball count counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and is used as a big prize opening in the big hit game that triggered the start of the consecutive villas and all the big hit games that occurred during the consecutive villas. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probabilistic state in the consecutive villa, the first KT state and the second KT state. It will be added at any time. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the jackpot games that occurred during the second KT state. A prize ball based on a game ball winning in the large winning opening and a prize ball based on a game ball winning in the special winning opening 24 in all small hit games generated in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas indicating the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas on the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is updated and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball counter after addition is displayed. The display of the number of prize balls during the special rush is updated based on the value of (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24), respectively. Add (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning) (step S654). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, the CPU 201 updates the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and also performs a special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after the addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display (for example, character display such as "+10") on the effect display device 9. (Step S657). Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S658), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S659).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S657 to S659.

By executing the processes of steps S656 to S656, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball addition display is displayed and the winning sound is output. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed, while the special winning opening 24 is not in the second KT state even if the game ball wins, the winning ball addition display is displayed, the winning sound is output, and the special winning opening is displayed. The lighting display of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to display the prize ball addition display, output the prize sound, and display the lighting of the special prize opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of these. You may.

If the received effect control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4301), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4302).

If the received effect control command is the second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4303), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S670). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the stop-displayed symbol is a jackpot symbol. Whether or not it is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation. It is determined whether or not it is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags is set), the process proceeds to step S4404.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the preparatory display flag indicating that the jackpot preparing display indicating that the jackpot is fluctuating has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the preparing display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

Further, in step S4402, if the preparatory display flag indicating that the preparatory display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The "preparing display" is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the characters "preparing for the jackpot" are displayed. This is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case where a still image including the characters "preparing for a big hit" is displayed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a display in preparation. The display may be configured to correspond to the period up to (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed if it is in the KT state. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparing display is executed in the normal state, and the preparing display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 41.
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs an instruction notification control process for controlling the instruction notification (step S4501), and performs a demo display control process (step S4502) for controlling the demo display.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs any of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol change processing (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Process during round (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening indicating that the large winning opening is open (closed) is received, interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is in progress, the value of the instruction notification timer is decremented by 1 (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y, S4605 in step S3503), and the first 1 If the reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed and displayed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing a demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, the normal state is determined.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step S4703). The first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. As a result, the first demo display is not executed when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711) and the first demo standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

After that, when the effect control CPU 201 is in the first demo display (Y in step S4713), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S4714), or based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (Y in step S4715), the first demo display is terminated (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, the KT state is determined.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step S4803). The second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). If it is not in the Y) or KT state (N in step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state is terminated. Specifically, in step S4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4808, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demo waiting flag is set, the second special symbol change is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demo standby timer. Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 is in the second demo display (Y in step S4813), the change of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or the KT state is finished (step). N) of S4815, the second demo display is terminated (step S4816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols do not match completely match. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the same combination as the reach-out symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, the background symbol display unit 9c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 and # 18), the process in step S923 and the background symbol fluctuation processing described later is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14, # 15, # 18), step S923 is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944 of the background symbol changing process, which will be described later, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol changing display.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol (step S945). It should be noted that whether or not the continuous effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are specified in the received variation pattern command. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing. If it is the start timing of the continuous effect, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display during the consecutive villas based on the current value of the first prize ball number counter (step S946). .. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is displayed when the player is in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect during the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the process of step S946, the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the first effect (step S947). It should be noted that whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second fluctuation pattern # 18 is specified by the received fluctuation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, whether the continuation effect is executed during the variation display of the background symbol and the second KT state continues. After suggesting whether or not, the first KT transition effect is executed, and the effect as if the second KT state has ended and the state has shifted to the first KT state is executed (however, at this stage, it is still the first internally. The 2KT state is not finished, and to be exact, the second KT state is finished at the start of the big hit), and then it develops into a battle production. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is controlled, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggered the control (step described later). (See S982), but when the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive villas and the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush in the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Further, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, Y in S5002), the jackpot is changed. The preparation display is executed (step S5003), and the preparation display flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is set. In step S5001, the process during the change of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and any one of the display result 2 designated command to the display result 6 designated command for the second decorative symbol is executed. If it is stored, it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. In step S5002, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol has started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed in the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly excluded. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced loss designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be missed to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control may be performed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the forced loss designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is determined only by forced error, and the variation pattern showing this special variation pattern. A command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. Good.

Then, if the background symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S987 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is controlled (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball counter. (Step S980). That is, since it is a case where a big hit occurs in a low probability / non-KT state, it is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S981). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, it is a case where the big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 controls to start the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

On the other hand, if it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, if the player is in the second KT state, a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S984).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects the process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S992).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S993), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the processes of steps S990 to S994. By executing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hit game is executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, and the special variable winning ball device 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed when a small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured so that neither the output of these predetermined opening sounds nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and the effect during the small hit game is produced in the first place. It may be configured not to execute the processing itself during the small hit.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S995).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the round post-processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) follows the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot (step S9007). ). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 3 designation command) that specifies the 6R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result 5) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command) has been received. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / first KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. Control is performed to start the display of the prize ball number display in the consecutive villas based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / second KT state after the jackpot game ends), if the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed, the second prize ball is displayed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush based on the number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush".

Although not shown in FIG. 55, if the jackpot game ending this time is based on a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (that is, a low probability state / first KT state is reached after the jackpot game ends). If), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "chance time".

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not in progress, the process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect is not set in the first place (see step S989), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not done, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

57 and 58 are explanatory views showing a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. In the display example shown in FIG. 57, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 57 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

The second normal instruction notification 55B at this time has the characters "Aim at the gate" and an image showing the game ball passing through the operating gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball is passing indicates the operating gate 17. , The square area above it indicates the gate 32).

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the first demo is displayed because the first special symbol is not changed even in the normal state, and the jackpot change of the second decorative symbol is performed. Is being done. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the jackpot preparation display is performed and the preparation display flag is set, and then in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the change of the second special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol. At this time, since the preparing display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. The second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (5). At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. You may.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B operates with the characters "aim at the gate". By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball passes indicates an operating gate 17, and a square area above it indicates a gate 32). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the change of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (8).

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the first special symbol is changed, the jackpot preparation is displayed and the change of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed when the first special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification, which are less visible than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification, are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the jackpot gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows the presence / absence of control of the jackpot game state, the presence / absence of the setting of the first KT flag, the presence / absence of execution of the normal symbol fluctuation, the presence / absence of the opening of the variable winning ball device 15, and the presence / absence of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. , And whether or not the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened is shown for each timing.

For example, while the jackpot game state is controlled (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol has a fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the normal symbol has a fluctuation stop time of 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 1.0 second, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. While the jackpot game state is controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 22 is not performed.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0.2 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, the first KT state is 7.0 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state, and 0.8 seconds as the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit. 1.0 second (assuming that the second reserved storage number ≥ 1) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after the second time after being controlled to.

At this time, rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state, the fluctuation time (7) of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state. .0 seconds) is longer. This is because, for example, if the standby before opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds. If the fluctuation time of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. It is conceivable that a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 in spite of being in the first KT state. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a predetermined route among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, a specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) provided in the game area 7 on the right side) through which the game medium can pass, and predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). After the establishment of, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). When it is Y in step S2501 (the part where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (In this example, the part in which steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state. Yes (in this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. The predetermined promotion notification (first instruction notification in this example) is executed, and the launch of the game medium to the specific area is promoted after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. It is decided that the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) can be executed (in this example, the portion where steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-20287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a game machine that controls the advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, and the game machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control the advantageous state. However, if a notification for prompting the launch of the game medium to a specific area is performed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production may become complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so that the second special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control so as not to be in the big hit game state during the break by appropriately notifying the opportunity to control the big hit game state.

Further, unlike the game machine described above, there is a game machine having a configuration in which the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the operating gate 17. , The player waits until the jackpot game state starts (until the jackpot is opened) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasteful hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be done. Similarly, in a game machine that shifts to the jackpot game state on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player also has a game ball from the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game state is started. It may try to wait for launch, in which case the jackpot game state will not start. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the jackpot game state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, the effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. Further, the effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used for the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in the predetermined promotion notification, and the predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9 in the specific promotion notification.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, game control). In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, the same process as in step S2015X is executed), and the advantageous state signal can be output externally based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions (in this example,). The game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2015X before executing step S2501 in the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process). As a result, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the game machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that fact (in this example, the game control). When the power is turned off before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the microcomputer 560 waits for the current situation (passing the game ball to the operating gate 17). If the information related to (in this example, "8", which is the value of the special symbol process flag corresponding to the process of waiting for passage through the first gate) is backed up, and the information is backed up when the power is turned on. A predetermined command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 executes a first instruction notification, a second instruction notification, or an effect that can be executed only when the power is turned on when the predetermined command is received. By doing so, it may be notified that the predetermined condition is satisfied). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on the situation in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is generated). The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot to be played and the game state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state according to the situation.

Specifically, when the fluctuation is performed using the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the jackpot, a battle production in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect during the fluctuation, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed before the victory or defeat of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, "Aim at the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit game state, the battle production is continued as a big hit production (that is, the variable production and the big hit production are a series of battle productions). Good. At that time, if the jackpot is of an advantageous type (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds, a jackpot with a long opening period of the jackpot, a jackpot that shifts to a probabilistic state, a jackpot that shifts to a KT state), the battle is won. If it is a big hit of a disadvantageous type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short opening period of the big winning opening, a big hit that does not shift to the probability change state, a big hit that does not shift to the KT state), it will be defeated in the battle. May be good.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed. It is possible (in this example, the part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol). The display result can be derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the second effect identification information (in this example, the second decoration) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (the second special symbol in this example). It is possible to derive and display the display result by executing the variable display of the symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed), and in the normal state, the second effect identification information. The variable display may be difficult to see, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be easy to see (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 has the second special symbol in the normal state. The second decorative symbol may be erased during the fluctuation of, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). As a result, attention can be paid to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display result of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the second reserved storage number.

It should be noted that "difficult to see" is a concept including "not visible" and "difficult to see".

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a specific area (a specific area through which the game medium can pass). In this example, the operation gate 17), the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be executed. At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the game control micro). By executing steps S26A and S26B in the computer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is After the stop display) is established, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the game control). A predetermined state (a portion in which steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hit game state) in the case of Y in step S2501 in the microcomputer 560. (In this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased compared to the normal state. ) (In this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific area is set. It is possible to execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium (in this example, the part that executes steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the player When the absence condition corresponding to the absence (in this example, the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the establishment, the specific promotion notification is executed in a predetermined mode (in this example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and when the absence condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the fact that it was established The specific promotion notification is executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the normal mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). As a result, in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied, the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area can be appropriately performed.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-20287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, but the game machine promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area. There was a risk that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in the case of a gaming machine that performs a second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9) even when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the game is finally played. When the final player who has been playing the game has already finished the game, but the other player is temporarily away from the seat and plays the game of the game machine. It is conceivable that a new player may be reluctant to play a game on the game machine because he thinks that it may lead to trouble. Therefore, as in the game machine shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the consciousness of avoidance by a new player by performing the specific promotion notification in a mode according to the situation, and promote the operation of the game machine. be able to.

In addition, there are those who try to enjoy the advantageous situation (big hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an act is performed, the game lacks fairness. It becomes. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the visibility is lower than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player). By executing the specific promotion notification in, it is difficult to recognize that the situation is before the advantageous situation, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, it is set as an "absence condition" that the change of the first special symbol is not executed even though it is in the normal state (to be exact, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). When it happens, it is considered that the absence condition is no longer satisfied), but it is not limited to this. For example, the player does not touch the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 5, or any area (operating gate 17, gate 32, first starting winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening, etc. The "absence condition" may be defined as not detecting the passage of the game ball through the special winning opening 24) for a predetermined period of time. Further, for example, it may be set as an "absence condition" that the start winning prize does not occur within a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example, the absence effect). , 1st demo display) can be executed (in this example, the part where step S4716 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). Thereby, the player's game can be appropriately promoted.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, it is controlled to a power saving state that reduces the power consumption on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the demonstration display was started. It may be. In the power saving state, it is consumed in each effect member by reducing the volume output from the speaker 27, reducing the brightness of the image display device 5, and reducing the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with the effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200), and the game control means is the first absence information (in this example) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information. , 1st customer waiting demo display designation command) and 2nd absence information (in this example, 2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second identification information. It is determined that transmission is possible (in this example, the portion where steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the first customer waiting demo display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol and the absence condition are satisfied based on the second special symbol. It was decided to separately provide a second customer waiting demo display designation command to indicate whether or not, but it is not limited to this, and a command to indicate whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, in the normal state, when the first special symbol is not changed in the state where the first reserved memory is not stored (regardless of whether the second special symbol is changed or the second reserved memory is present). When the common command is transmitted and the second special symbol is not changed in the KT state when the second reserved memory is not stored (whether or not the first special symbol is changed or the first reserved memory is stored). The common command may be sent (with or without).

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Special state control information indicating whether or not it is controlled to a special state (background specification command in this example) and absence information indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display) A designated command and a second customer waiting demo display designated command) can be transmitted (in this example, the part that executes steps S51A, S51B, S60A, and S60B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is special. It is possible to execute an absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied based on the state control information and the absence information (in this example, in step S4502 of the effect control microcomputer 200, a background designation command and a customer waiting demo display are displayed. The part where the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the specified command). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, according to this embodiment, information indicating whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as a hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage). A means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and an advantageous notification effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating control to an advantageous state can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). Steps S904 to S907 in steps), the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold storage indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state is started during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information controlled in the advantageous state. If this is done, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB, the processing after step S65B is not performed. Even when the jackpot random number is stored as the second hold memory, the fluctuation with respect to the second hold memory is forcibly removed, and the effect control microcomputer 200 does not execute the jackpot effect related to the second identification information). .. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing the game, and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed and the second identification information. The variable display of (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel. The specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (in this example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560). It is advantageous and advantageous for the player based on the fact that the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to a predetermined state different from the normal state (in this example, the small hit game state) (in this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and it is controlled to a predetermined state rather than the normal state. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) with increased frequency (in this example, a part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560). , It is possible to execute a notification effect (in this example, a jackpot preparation display) for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, a part in which step S5003 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). When the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the person is not satisfied, the notification effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, for effect control). The microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002), and changes the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state. The execution of the notification effect is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002. do not do). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through a specific area is described, but the game machine appropriately notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied. There was a risk that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

Note that "restricting execution" means not executing as in the present embodiment or executing in a mode that is difficult to recognize (for example, executing a notification effect using an image smaller than usual or an image having a low density). It is a concept that includes performing a notification effect that outputs sound at a volume lower than usual.

Further, the specific example of the notification effect is not limited to that described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a notification effect. Further, as the notification effect, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a game medium (in this example, a game medium). A variable starting device (in this example) that can be changed into an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which a game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. , A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. The variable starting device can be changed and controlled to an approach advantageous state or an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a part in which step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the game medium entering the variable starting device (in this example). , The part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), Hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as hold storage (in this example, second hold storage) (this example). Then, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed. Part), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that in the normal state (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state (book) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the example, it can be controlled to a high probability / second KT state), and when it is controlled to the advantageous state, it is disadvantageous to enter the variable starting device for a specific period longer than when it is controlled to the first special state. It is possible to control the change to the state (in this example, step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560. By executing C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the jackpot game state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state. As the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state (the part controlled to the closed state), the variable display of the first period is executed regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the hold storage means. It is possible (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern is set using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G). By deciding, it is possible to change the second special symbol for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and it is controlled to the first special state as the second and subsequent variable display of the second identification information. , When the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, variable display in the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (in this example, for game control). The microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, the second reserved storage number is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H). If it is 1 or more, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed for 1.0 second (the time controlled by the first KT state and shorter than the first variation time of 7.0 seconds). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state by configuring it as in the present embodiment.

For example, in this embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, the special variable winning ball device 22 actually enters. The special winning opening 24 is set so as to rarely win a prize, but in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 is placed to some extent on the bottom member. There is a possibility that the game balls of the above are accumulated, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening 24. .. Therefore, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 accumulate on the bottom surface member even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls are dropped, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24, which is more than expected in the first KT state. It prevents the situation where the prize ball of is obtained.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, the partial special state (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degree of advantage of the plurality of special states is different.

Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. Variable display for one period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G) is obtained in the first fluctuation. By determining the variation pattern using the table, the second special symbol is used for 7.0 seconds (the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the jackpot game state is longer than 3.8 seconds) regardless of the number of reserved memories. (Fluctuation is feasible), and as the second and subsequent variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state, the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is a predetermined number or more. In the case of, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, FIG. 13 (E). ) Or by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H), if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the jackpot game state). It is possible to change the second special symbol over a time (less than 3.8 seconds)). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when the control is performed in the second special state, the second identification information is held regardless of the number of times the second identification information is variably displayed after being controlled in the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of reserved storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is the second KT state in the second KT state. 2 When changing the special symbol, regardless of the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the second KT state, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, the second special symbol is changed over 1 second. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second special symbol may be changed over 3 seconds.) As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, which is an advantageous state for the player (this example). Then, it is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and has a special area (gate 32 in this example) through which the game medium (game ball in this example) can pass, and an approach advantage in which the game medium can enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can change between a state (open state in this example) and a disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state, and the game medium has passed through the special area. Based on this, it is possible to execute variable display of the normal identification information (in this example, the normal symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S5100 to S5102 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the normal identification information is variablely displayed. Based on this, it is possible to change the variable starting device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, the part where step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable starting device. The variable display of the identification information can be executed (in this example, the part where step S26B is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit). Based on the design), it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device into an approach advantageous state (in this example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560). (Parts in which S358 to S360 are executed), and can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased (in this example, steps S2208A and S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. (In this example, it can be controlled to high probability / second KT state), and in the first special state, the game medium that has passed through the special area when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed becomes the variable starting device. The variable starting device is controlled so that it can enter (in this example, a game ball). The minimum required time from passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and in the first KT state, variable winning is performed 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. By controlling the ball device 15 to the open state, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state and the winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the one game ball is variable as it is. It is possible to win a prize in the winning ball device 15). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state by configuring it as in the present embodiment.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 is not opened by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, the partial special state (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degree of advantage of the plurality of special states is different.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game control device. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the second KT state as shown in FIG. 15 (2). (Controlled in a closed state for 3.8 seconds), the variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area does not easily enter the variable starting device when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed. (In this example, the minimum required time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and the time when the game ball flows down on the variable winning ball device 15. Is 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds. Therefore, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the second KT state, a variable winning ball is won. When the ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state has a longer fluctuation time of the normal symbol than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable winning time over a longer period than the first KT state. It was decided to control the ball device 15 to the closed state, but the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. May be realized.

For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to have a longer symbol determination time than the first KT state. It may be realized to control the state.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the second KT state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit ( By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state. You may.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is shown in FIG. As shown in (1), in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds, and in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 3.8 seconds in the same manner as in the second KT state. The variable starter is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starter when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed (in this example, the game is controlled). The shortest time required for the ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.5 seconds. Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be open when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the normal state. If so, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being launched (right-handed) aiming at the special area in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol has a longer fluctuation time in the normal state than in the first KT state, so that the normal state has a variable winning ball device over a longer period than the first KT state. Although it was decided to control the 15 to the closed state, it was realized that the variable winning ball device 15 could be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. You may.

For example, by configuring the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. It may be realized to control.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit (FIG. By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. May be good.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the small hit game state cannot be controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the small hit game state can be controlled. In that case, when the change of the second special symbol is started while the small hit variation of the first special symbol is being performed, the second special symbol may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (it does not become a normal loss) except when it is a forced loss. It is not limited to the above, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be a normal deviation. For example, by setting the small hit ratio to 1/2, it is possible to make a loss, and when the small hits are continuous (the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation after the first small hit fluctuation). (When) is not executed when the small hits are not continuous (when the next fluctuation of the small hits is a big hit or a miss), a special effect (for example, an effect to notify that the small hits are continuous) May be executed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the approach advantageous state (in this example, the open state) in which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter and the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to an approach disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) and an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to and is provided, and the variable starting device can be controlled by any one of a plurality of open patterns (see FIG. 15). .. Further, the variable display can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device, and the variable display is predetermined based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It is possible to control the variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the variable device to an approach advantageous state, and to control it to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. Is. Further, as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having different degrees of advantage from the first special state. ) And can be controlled. Then, the variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different ratios depending on whether the control is performed in the first special state or the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state). , As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when controlling the special state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to be open for 5 seconds. At least in the case of the second KT state, the rate of short-opening the variable winning ball device 15 may be higher.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot), and a second special state. Has a higher advantage than the first special state (in this example, in the first KT state, it is rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game, whereas in the second KT state. Then, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game). In addition, it is possible to control the second special state according to the type of advantageous state (in this example, the high probability / second KT state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it is possible to pay attention to which type of the advantageous state is obtained.

Further, it may be configured to execute different effects during the big hit game depending on the type of big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects is taken over during the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the end of the second KT state. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by impressing the player that the control is in the second special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the sound output of the music is inherited from the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the second KT state to the subsequent second KT state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the moving image may be inherited and displayed, the round number display may be inherited and displayed, or the prize ball number display may be inherited and displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided. It is possible to control the specific variable device to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state. In addition, it is determined whether or not the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state (in this example, whether or not it is a hit in the normal drawing), and the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state at the same ratio regardless of the state. Whether or not it is determined (in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26C), whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state). Regardless of which one is the jackpot game state or not, the same probability is used to determine whether or not the game is a normal hit). Therefore, regarding the entry of the game medium into the specific variable device, it is possible to prevent the influence of the variable starting device that can control the approach advantageous state even during the advantageous state, so that the digestion period of the advantageous state can be shortened. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (probability change state in this example) after controlling to an advantageous state, which is the same as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example). It is possible to control to the third special state (low probability / first KT state in this example) in which the open pattern is selected by the ratio and the variable starter is controlled and the variable display pattern is selected by a different ratio and the variable display is executed. Is. Then, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is completed, the low probability / 1st KT Transition to state). Therefore, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it is possible to give an opportunity to discourage the player from ending the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with delay means (regulation piece 118 in this example) for delaying the flow of the game medium. Therefore, by providing the delay means, the flow speed of the game medium is delayed, the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starting device can be further increased in the first special state, and the predetermined variable device in the second special state. The rate of entry of game media into the game can be further increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example). At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the first special symbol). The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to a predetermined state (small hit game state in this example), and it is also possible to determine a variable display time (variable time in this example), and the second identification information is variable. When the display is executed, it can be determined that the predetermined state is controlled at a higher rate than the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is possible to decide to make a small hit only in some cases). Then, when the control is performed in the special state, a shorter time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the control is performed in the non-special state (in this example). As shown in FIGS. 13 (C), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, whereas as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). , In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes and 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the game machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may not be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. It may be configured to give priority to the variable display of any of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol may be out of order. , It is desirable not to be too gambling than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operating gate 17) through which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can pass is provided, and the player is in an advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). It is controllable. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player takes a break from the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the control to the advantageous state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the low probability / first KT state is completed. If the player has entered a break due to the long-time variable display, even if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit game will proceed during the break. It can be limited and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interests of the player are impaired.

In this embodiment, the case where the operating gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32 is shown, but the gate 32 and the operating gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be configured to shift to the big hit game as it is after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state. Further, when the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, the advantageous state signal can be output externally. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

The external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not always indispensable, and the advantageous state signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol), the game medium is set in the first area (in this example, the big winning opening). It is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) in which (a game ball in this example) can enter, and the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the game medium can enter the second region (in this example, the special winning opening 24). It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased, and as special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the first It is possible to control to a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Then, a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal) can be externally output in response to the entry of the game medium into the second region. Therefore, the entry status of the game medium into the second region can be notified to the outside, and the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the jackpot signal 1 is not output, the prize ball rate (the number of prize balls obtained per 100 shots of game balls, BA) is BA> 100. There is a possibility that an act of illegally obtaining a prize ball was performed even though the jackpot game was not in progress, and the hall management computer can determine that it is abnormal. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game in the KT state. , BA> 100 is not determined to be abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the game machine can be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output a special signal common to the case where the control is performed in the first special state and the case where the control is performed in the second special state (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally regardless of whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output processing on the game machine side.

As a modification shown in FIG. 33, as special signals, a first special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal different from the first special signal (in this example). , Special winning opening winning signal 2) can be output externally, the first special signal can be output externally when controlled to the first special state, and the second special signal can be output when controlled to the second special state. 2 The special signal can be output externally (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output externally during the first KT state, and the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output externally during the second KT state). It may be configured as. With such a configuration, the state of the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the modified example shown in FIG. 33, when the big hit signal 1 is not output and the big hit signal 2 is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the prize ball rate in the first KT state. It may be calculated as (BA1), and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it may be calculated as the winning ball rate (BA2) in the second KT state. Then, in the second KT state, a corresponding prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game. Therefore, even if BA2> 100, it is not judged as abnormal, and the prize ball is likely to be a small hit in the first KT state. Is rarely obtained. Therefore, if BA1> 100, it may be determined as abnormal. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate management from the outside of the game machine.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, even though the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, even though it is not in the KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (special winning opening winning signal 1). And the special winning opening winning signal 2) is also output, it may be determined that it is abnormal and notified to the game clerk or the like. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to the game clerk or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, since the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example), the special winning opening 24 is awarded a prize. It is configured so that only the special winning opening winning signal indicating that it has been detected can be output, and the external output signal is not particularly output when the winning to the large winning opening is detected. Even with such a configuration, the abnormal state of the game machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying an external device such as a hall management computer of the winning status of the special winning opening 24.

The external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal) is not always indispensable, and the special signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display display result is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state in this example) based on the predetermined display result (small hit symbol in this example). It is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state), and to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. It is provided with a specific area (special winning opening 24 in this example) into which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter in a special state, and as a special state, a first special state (high probability / first in this example). It is possible to control a 1KT state) and a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. In addition, it is possible to execute an entry effect (in this example, display of prize ball addition display, output of prize sound, lighting display of special prize opening lamp 24a) based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state. Therefore, when the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 when it is not in the second KT state, the prize ball The addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, by preventing the entry effect from being executed depending on the entry of the irregular game medium in the first special state (in this example, the special winning opening 24 is rarely won in the first KT state), the game state is set. In addition to being able to achieve consistency in the production, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect when controlling to a special state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state), and the advantageous states are the first advantageous state (in this example, the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the first. It is possible to control to 2 advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot). Further, it is possible to control to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and to be controlled to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R). After the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / 1st KT state, and after the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state), from the period controlled to the second advantageous state. 2 It is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) over a period controlled by the special state. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the approach effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display) and an effect by sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium. (In this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting body (in this example, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, execution of the entry effect (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a), and the special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT). Is not always required, and may be configured so as not to perform one or both of these effects.

In this embodiment, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the variation display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second variation display corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol The case where the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the background symbol are executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be feasible. May be good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp or LED other than the effect display device 9. May be good.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the low probability / first KT state is configured to end based on the execution of the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the second KT state (high probability / second KT state in this example) may be configured to end based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times, and conversely, the second KT may be configured based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where a plurality of big hit types are provided only for the big hit is shown, but a plurality of small hit types may be provided also for the small hit. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type, or the variable winning ball device to be released may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the advantage may be different depending on the small hit type. When the variable winning ball device to be opened is configured to be different, for example, the special variable winning ball device 20 may be opened or the special variable winning ball device 22 may be opened depending on the small hit type. Alternatively, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices for small hits may be provided, and which special variable winning ball device may be opened may be configured differently depending on the small hit type.

Further, in this embodiment, the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) is mainly shifted to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the high probability / first KT state is shifted to the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot. In the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the case of transitioning to the low probability / first KT state has been shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the jackpot type is the same, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even if the same 6R probability variation jackpot or 6R normal jackpot is used, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state.

In this embodiment, it is internally configured to control to the KT state, but when it is controlled to the first KT state, small hits are likely to occur, but it is rarely special. No prize is given to the winning opening 24, and from the player's point of view, it looks as if it is controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same playability as a game machine controlled to a so-called high base state, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different advantages. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (directing symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. The display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another substrate (for example, FIG. 4). The sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc., and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) shown in A control command may be transmitted so as to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in response to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is obtained in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and is a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as the above and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be probabilistic jackpots. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of executing a game, in which the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variablely displayed. ), And while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed. Display executing means (for example, a portion in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560). , An advantageous state advantageous for the player based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a jackpot symbol). For example, an advantageous state control means that can be controlled to a jackpot game state (for example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560), a variable display of the first identification information, and a second identification. A predetermined state (for example, a small hit game) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state based on the derivation display of the predetermined display result (for example, the small hit symbol) as the display result of either one of the variable display of the information. A predetermined state control means that can be controlled to the state) (for example, a portion that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a special state (for example, a portion that is controlled to the predetermined state more frequently than the normal state). A notification that a special state control means that can be controlled to the KT state (for example, a portion that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and a predetermined condition are satisfied. The notification effect executing means (for example, the part that executes step S5003 in the effect control microcomputer 200) is provided so that the effect (for example, the display during preparation for big hit) can be executed. The notification effect executing means is provided by the player in a normal state. A predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition corresponding to the absence (for example, not executing the fluctuation of the first special symbol even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied. Based on this, the notification effect can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 200 has Y, S in step S5000. Execute S5003 when Y of 5001 and Y of S5002), and execute the notification effect based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state. (For example, the effect control microcomputer 200 does not execute S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001 and N in S5002), and further, a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in the game can be executed. A means (for example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control for displaying the immersive prevention image 90131) is provided, and the attention-calling means is at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer waiting demonstration state) and when the advantageous state ends. (For example, the ending period, etc.) can be used to call attention to the prevention of entanglement (for example, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed, etc.). A warning regarding prevention of entanglement is executed (for example, in the customer waiting demonstration state, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 73 (h), and in the ending period, the figure is shown. As shown in 76 (b), the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909, and as shown in FIG. The display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter, etc.) Game machines can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of sinking.

When the absence condition is satisfied (the first special symbol is not changed) in the normal state (a state that is not a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased), the second identification information is variably displayed. When the condition is satisfied (becomes a big hit) and the execution of the notification effect is restricted (reduction instruction notifications 56C and 56D are performed as shown in FIGS. 58 (7) and (8)), the user is absorbed. It may or may not be necessary to issue a warning regarding prevention, but it is considered that the player is absent but not in a non-gaming state, and the warning regarding prevention of immersiveness should not be executed. Even if the arousal is executed, it is desirable to display it small. In this way, compared to the case where the alert is displayed in a large size, when the player who has been away from the seat tries to restart the game, the alert is noticed and the motivation for the game is reduced, and the interest of the game is reduced. Does not decrease (or the decrease can be reduced), so that it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

Further, in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is possible to appropriately issue a warning regarding prevention of entanglement. As an example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and that can execute a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in the game. The means (for example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control for displaying the immersive prevention image 90131) is provided, and the alerting means is at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer waiting demonstration state) and the advantageous state ends. At that time (for example, the ending period, etc.), it is possible to call attention to the prevention of entanglement (for example, display the entanglement prevention image 90131), and when the non-gaming state and when the advantageous state ends. (For example, in the customer waiting demonstration state, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed in large size at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 73 (h), and the ending is displayed. During the period, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909, and as shown in FIG. 71, after the big hit is completed than in the customer waiting demonstration state. The display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter during the ending period, etc.) A gaming machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 60 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front. FIG. 61 is a hit type table.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area 907 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906). In the pachinko game machine 901, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 904 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and the player A stick controller 90122 is attached which can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right). In the stick controller 90122, a player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and presses and pulls the stick controller 90122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 62) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation rod of the stick controller 90122, a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 62) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 90125 or the like is provided. See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 62) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 62) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

On the member forming the ball striking plate (upper plate) 903, for example, the player presses a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 90122) to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 62) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 60, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be set to be closer to the left or right on the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch, a cross key switch, and a jog dial may be provided.

Near the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 is provided as a display means capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, there is a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variable display of three decorative (effect) effect symbols, left, middle, and right, is formed.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 908a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908b is used to display the effect. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013). Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variation display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the establishment of the state where the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 909 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps or sounds. This production is called reach production. Further, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color or the like) of a background image of the effect display device 909 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called the reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning opening 9014 than the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 using the rotational force of the drive motor (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the second 2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. , Hold display area, not shown). In the total hold storage display unit, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number of pending memories.) Is displayed. By providing the total hold storage display unit that displays the total number in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. It is called a memory display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 9020 repeatedly controls the open state and the closed state repeatedly. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open is called a round. As a result, repetitive continuation control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 that variablely displays the normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Further, an accessory 9012 is provided above the effect display device 909. The accessory 9012 is located between the game board 906 and the effect display device 909, and the position can be displaced by the accessory motor 9017. The accessory 9012 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to see, and moves to a position that is visible to the player when a predetermined effect is executed (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 909).

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

In the hit type table of FIG. 61, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or It is closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

Of the "big hits", the probabilistic state is a state in which after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a higher probability that the special gaming state will be determined to be a big hit as compared with the normal state (normal gaming state that is not the probabilistic state). The type of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for a probability fluctuation state, also called a high probability state) is called a "probability variation jackpot". Further, in this embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. There is.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Further, among the "big hits", the type of big hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of 15 rounds and then controlled to the time saving state but does not shift to the probabilistic state is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special gaming state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened in association with the probability change state or the time saving state. The variable winning ball device 9015 may be controlled to the electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approach, higher frequency). Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control includes control that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and the normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is high. Is increased, and it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the start (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 9014 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a variable winning ball device 9015, that is, a control that facilitates winning of the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, as terms indicating a combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The "low probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 61, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. In addition, the normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do. The probabilistic jackpot may not end until the condition that the next jackpot occurs is satisfied.

FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 62 also shows a payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 9057. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 built-in. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or the whole thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and occurs at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 90503.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. In addition, the output circuit 9059 that drives the solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variable display of ordinary symbols, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100, ROM 90102, RAM 90103, VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90 105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via a relay board 9077 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In addition to controlling the fluctuation display of the effect display device 909, the display of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side is controlled via the lamp driver board 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output board 9070. Performs various production controls such as controlling the sound output of. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the control according to the program stored in the ROM 90102 in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (or the effect control CPU 90101) executes (or the effect control CPU 90101) below. (Processing) specifically means that the effect control CPU 90101 executes the control according to the program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on the board other than the effect control board 9080.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 to the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 vibrates the stick controller 90122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the accessory motor 9017 via a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 9012.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 63, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R': A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R'is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or one of probabilistic jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2'(MR2'): Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4').

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R'), the big hit type is one of these based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random'1). It is decided by the jackpot type of. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1'). Therefore, the random number 1'is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol.

Further, the variation pattern is first determined by using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2'), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3'). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is sometimes called a fluctuation type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-saving state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 64 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 64 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 64 (A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot judgment values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value) is set. .. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 64 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 64 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. 64 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when performed). FIG. 64 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the second hold memory) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed). This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1') of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1'values match, and as the jackpot symbol, the jackpot symbol in which the random 1'values match. To determine. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when selecting the jackpot type from among a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (C) is used in FIG. 64. It may be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in a high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (C) may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 (B). .. By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the game control microcomputer 90560, as shown in FIG. 65, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 65 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols. The command 9000 (H) is a command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the game machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the game machine is resumed. The command 9F00 (H) is a command for designating the demonstration display of waiting for customers (specifying that the demo state is waiting for customers). After receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines that the player is not playing a game (in a customer waiting state) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and displays the demonstration screen. .. In addition, when the power failure is restored during the progress of the game such as during the variable display or the big hit game state, the power is restored in a state corresponding to the progress status of the game at the time of the power failure.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that specifies that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a total hold storage number designation command indicating the total hold storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total hold storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the total hold storage number designation command is executed at the time of starting the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when executing the start opening switch passing process described later). , Is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Further, the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the start of the variation display (for example, when the special symbol variation display processing process described later is executed). The total hold storage specification command and the hold storage number subtraction specification command may also be used. For example, the total hold storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the hold storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that the production control microcomputer 90100 sends a command capable of specifying the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively, not as the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The total value of and may be specified as the total number of pending storages.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the type of the jackpot, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. .. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

Next, a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (hold storage data) corresponding to the hold storage on the game control microcomputer 90560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 9055.

In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R'), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1'), which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination. Random numbers (random 2') and random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns (random 3') are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 9056 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 90503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, these random values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014.

The storage of information regarding the start winning prize as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but are described later in the variation pattern setting process. It may be extracted at (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

As will be described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer in this way is read at the start winning prize and used for the look-ahead notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

When there is a start prize to the first start prize opening 9013 or the second start prize opening 9014, it is called a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a total pending memory number designation command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start winning prize designation command, and total hold storage number designation command are stored. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured so that various commands such as the above can be stored in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the production display operation in the production and the like, or various production operations that do not involve the variable display of the production symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the high level of the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 90560. Is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not. , Step S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 901 and subsequent main processes are started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings (S901 to S905).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the clear switch is turned on (S906). If the clear switch is not turned on in S906, it is confirmed whether or not the data protection process of the backup RAM area (for example, the process when the power supply is stopped such as the addition of parity data) is performed when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. (S907). In this embodiment, when the power supply is stopped, a process for protecting the data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such a power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop has been saved. .. When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing.

Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer saved in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing according to the execution of the power supply stop processing (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not it is.

If it is determined that the control state at the time of power supply stop is saved, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (S908).

In the power supply stop processing, the checksum is calculated by the same processing as the above processing, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In S908, the calculated checksum and the stored checksum are compared. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (process of S901 to S9013) executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time of recovery from the power supply stop, is executed. To do.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process (S9041 to S9042) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing). For example, in order to return to the state when the power supply is stopped, data such as a special symbol process flag backed up in the backup RAM, a flag indicating an abnormal state, and a flag indicating a game stop state are read. When the backed up various data are read out in this way, the game control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started from the state when the power supply is stopped using the data. Then, it shifts to S9014.

In S9014, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90503. Then, the CPU 9056 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (for example). S9015).

When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt disabled state (S9016), executes the initial value random number update process (S9018) and the display random number update process (S9018), and then again. The interrupt permission state is set (S9019). That is, the CPU 9056 is in the interrupt prohibited state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and is in the interrupt enable state when the execution of the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process is completed. To.

The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value such as a counter for generating a determination random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (determination random number generation counter). When the count value of the judgment random number generation counter goes around once, the initial value is set in the counter.

Further, the display random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display. In this embodiment, as the display random number, a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern for determining a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol or the like is used.

Further, when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is also set in the timer interrupt process described later in the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process. This is to avoid conflicting with the processing in the timer interrupt processing because it is executed (that is, the same processing is also executed in S9024 and S9025 of the timer interrupt processing). That is, if a timer interrupt occurs during the processing of S9017 and S9018 and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, the count value The continuity of is impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt prohibition state is set during the processing of S9017 and S9018.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 67. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S9020). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their states are determined (switch processing: S9021). ..

Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). .. The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S90312). Then, depending on the internal state, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 9013. The first hold storage buffer to be stored, and the second hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 9014. Is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 9013a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting. Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "first" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "second" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed.

The processes of S90300 to S90307 are as follows. The special symbol normal process (S90300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the type of big hit when the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the random number for determining the variation pattern), and measures the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S90304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305) is a process of controlling the opening of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 9020 according to the type of big hit. The processing during opening of the large winning opening (S90306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect during the big hit game state to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control and the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening. This is a process for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S90307). The jackpot end process (S90307) is a process for controlling the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S90701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in RAM 90103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (S90705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (SR1'-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1'-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol. A random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating ('-3, etc.) is executed (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, and each of them is cyclically updated within a predetermined range. It is used as a random number by extracting each at a predetermined timing.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S90707).

By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits from the game control microcomputer 90560 and responds to the effect control command received, the effect display device 909, various lamps, and the effect control. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various effect controls are performed according to the gaming state.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 69. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and after executing the look-ahead effect process (S90700) for selecting the type of the look-ahead effect, the value of the effect control process flag. Any of S90800 to S90807 is performed according to the above.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. The control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The pre-reading effect processing (S90700) is a process for determining pre-reading such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining the effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect is a change in the special symbol based on the hold information (holding memory information) before the turn of the display (symbol change) of the special symbol arrives. It is a production technique that determines the content of the display and gives a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S98001) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S90802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S90803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and controlling to derive and display the display result (final stop symbol) of the variation display.

The jackpot display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S90805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process. The round post-processing (S90806) is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 909 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is composed of process timer setting values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) are described. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

[Caution]
In this embodiment, various alerts are executed for the player. As a warning, a control is performed in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is used to notify the player of various cautions regarding the game. For example, as a reminder, a notification is given to suppress excessive games. In this embodiment, images corresponding to various alerts are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909. It should be noted that such a warning may be executed not only by displaying an image but also by outputting a sound. Hereinafter, an example of a warning display displayed on the effect display device 909 as a warning will be specifically described.

[About the immersive prevention display]
As a warning display, there is a immersive prevention display as a display for preventing the player from being too enthusiastic about the game of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the slot machine. In the anti-enthusiast display, for example, the words "Pachinko slot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of the immersiveness." And the image that surrounds the characters are displayed. Further, the immersive prevention image is provided with an image surrounding the character and an image of a plurality of types having different display areas, although the content of the character is the same. With such a immersive prevention display, the player is restrained or warned from being absorbed in the game, and the player is restrained or warned from spending a large amount of money on the game.

[About the display to prevent forgetting to take]
As a warning display, forgetting to remove a prepaid card or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can identify the magnitude of the game value of a game ball or the like that can be used for the game. There is a forget-to-take prevention display as a prevention display. In the forget-to-take prevention display, for example, an image showing the ejection of the card is displayed together with the characters "Please be careful not to forget or steal the prepaid card." It should be noted that, instead of a card, a coin or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value such as a game ball that can be used for the game is targeted. You may perform an alert.

[About other warning displays]
Other warning signs include a warning sign that prohibits games under the age of 18 saying "Games under the age of 18 are prohibited by law" and a fraudulent act that says "Fraud is a crime." A warning display, a warning display for suppressing fraudulent acts such as "Please be careful about fraud disguised as a strategy" are displayed with characters and images. The other warning indications may be other than those shown above. For example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movement of the movable accessory may be displayed. Therefore, care may be taken not to get injured.

[About display timing]
The above warning display is a menu for changing the content of the production during the customer waiting demo state, which is shifted when the game is not executed for a predetermined period, and during the ending period when the jackpot game state ends. It is displayed in each display period such as during the display period of the screen. The alert display is displayed in various display modes depending on the type of display and the display period. Such a warning display will be described below.

FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining various displays during the customer waiting demonstration state and after the end of the big hit. FIG. 71A is a diagram for explaining various displays including the immersive prevention display during the customer waiting demonstration state (hereinafter, also simply referred to as during the demonstration). Further, FIGS. 71 (b) and 71 (c) are diagrams for explaining various displays including a squeeze prevention display during the ending period after the end of the big hit. FIG. 71 (b) shows the display after the end of the first big hit, and FIG. 71 (c) shows the display after the end of the second and subsequent big hits when the big hits are continuous.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time elapses after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it is determined that the game is not being played, and the demonstration screen is displayed. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 side to the effect control microcomputer 90100 side when the start winning is not generated and there is no hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Will be done. The demo state ends with the start of a game such as the occurrence of a new start prize.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), during the demonstration, three symbols (for example, three numerical symbols such as “375”), which are the final loss stop symbols, are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909. After being displayed for 15 seconds, a function introduction movie as a video introducing functions such as how to play and directing the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed for 39 seconds. After that, as the warning display, the other warning display and the immersive prevention display are displayed for 6 seconds. The detailed display contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is initialized, the display on the screen starts from the three symbol display which is the first screen in the demo state. On the other hand, if there is a power outage recovery during the customer waiting demonstration where the power supply is stopped and restarted due to a power outage, the production will not start from the 3 symbol display, which is the first screen of the demo state, but other warnings. The display on the screen starts from the timing when the display and the immersive prevention display are executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the ending display is displayed during the ending period after the end of the first big hit. In the ending display, while the background image of the ending is displayed for 10 seconds, the mode display which is the information about the effect mode after the end of the big hit selected during the big hit is executed, and then the probability change number (time reduction) after the end of the big hit is executed. The probability variation number display (time reduction number display) indicating the number of times) is displayed. In addition, from 2 seconds before the end of the ending display, the prepaid card forgetting prevention display and the immersive prevention display are displayed together with the ending display. After that, along with the manufacturer logo display (also referred to as manufacturer information) indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the entanglement prevention display is displayed for 2 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the ending display is displayed during the ending period after the end of the second and subsequent big hits. Here, the second and subsequent jackpots are jackpots when the jackpot is hit again during 100 fluctuation displays (during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state) after the end of the jackpot including the first jackpot. In such a continuous second and subsequent jackpots, as with the first jackpot, the effect mode after the jackpot selected during the jackpot while the background image of the ending for 10 seconds is displayed as the ending display. The mode display, which is information about the above, and the probability variation number display (time reduction number display), which is information indicating the probability variation number (time reduction number) after the end of the big hit, are displayed. However, unlike the first big hit, the immersive prevention display is displayed together with the ending display from 2 seconds before the end of the ending display, but the prepaid card forgetting prevention display is not displayed. After that, the entanglement prevention display is displayed for 2 seconds together with the maker logo display indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

As shown in FIG. 71, since the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state, an excessive warning display is performed when the big hit is finished. It is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being less enjoyable.

[About power saving mode]
Next, the power saving mode will be described. In this embodiment, when the customer waiting demonstration state continues for a predetermined time, a power saving mode is executed in which the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight of the effect display device 909 is suppressed to a low level to save power. The power saving mode shifts after the demo state of 15 seconds for the three symbol display shown in Fig. 71, 39 seconds for the function introduction movie, and 6 seconds for the other warning display and the immersive prevention display, for a total of 60 seconds, is executed three times. Will be done. That is, the power saving mode is entered 3 minutes after the customer waiting demo state is started. Further, the power saving mode ends on condition that the game is started. For example, the power saving mode ends when the game ball is driven into the game area 907. Further, the power saving mode is terminated by the player operating the push button 90120 or the stick controller 90122. When the handle is provided with a sensor, the power saving mode may be terminated by detecting the operation of the player by touching the sensor.

Such a power saving mode can be set to ON / OFF by a game clerk. As a method of setting the power saving mode, for example, a mechanical hard switch is provided on the effect control board 9080, and when the power is turned on while the hard switch is in a specific mode, the setting screen is displayed. Just do it. Here, the specific mode is a state in which the switch can be switched between items 0 to 9 and items A to F, and is installed in item F, for example. When the power is turned on while it is installed in item F, a setting screen for whether or not to execute the power saving mode is displayed. After that, if the hard switch is set to any of 0 to 5, the player can adjust the volume (0 is the minimum sound, 5 is the maximum sound), and if it is set to any of 6 to B, the player can adjust the volume. The volume is fixed (6 is the lowest note, B is the highest note). The light intensity adjustment can be set in any state. If you only adjust the amount of light, you will not be able to adjust the volume even if you open the menu screen. When C to E are selected, it is in the same state as 0.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining various displays during the customer waiting demo state and the power saving mode. FIG. 72A shows various displays when shifting from the customer waiting demo state to the power saving mode. Further, FIG. 72 (b) shows a display mode of the other warning display and the immersive prevention display, in particular, during the customer waiting demonstration state.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the power saving mode is entered after the demo state in which three symbol displays, a function introduction movie, and other warning displays and the immersive prevention display are set as one set as a customer waiting demo state is executed three times. Will be done. In the power saving mode, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight of the effect display device 909 decreases, so that the screen becomes dark. Therefore, in the power saving mode, the function introduction movie is executed for 39 seconds after the three symbol display is executed for 15 seconds on the dark screen. However, in the power saving mode, the other warning display and the immersive prevention display are not displayed after the function introduction movie. During the power saving mode, after the function introduction movie, the display shifts to the three-symbol display again.

Then, when the power saving mode ends, the immersive prevention display on the first screen is displayed for 5 seconds. After that, if the variable display of the symbols due to the start winning is not started, the demo state starts from the 3 symbol display again.

Next, a display mode of the other warning display and the entanglement prevention display will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). Other warning signs include the above-mentioned warning display prohibiting games under the age of 18. Here, for convenience of explanation, of the multiple types of other alert displays, the alert display that prohibits games under the age of 18 is alert A, the alert display for suppressing fraudulent activity is alert B, and fraud. The alert display for suppressing the action will be described as alert C.

As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the other warning display and the immersive display are displayed and erased within 6 seconds. Here, 1F (frame) is used as a display unit. In this embodiment, 1F corresponds to 1/30 second. First, among the plurality of other alert displays, the alert A fades in over the fade-in period of 15F (0.5S) and is displayed over the display period of 142F. After that, the alert A fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and disappears over the non-display period of 14F.

After the non-display period on the 6th floor, the attention alert B fades in from the middle of the fade-in period on the alert A over the fade-in period on the 15th floor (0.5S), and is displayed over the display period on the 136th floor. After that, the alert B fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S), and is hidden over the non-display period of 14F.

Attention C is faded in from the middle of the fade-in period of alert A and alert B to the fade-in period of 15F (0.5S) after the non-display period of 12F, and is displayed over the display period of 130F. Will be done. After that, the alert C fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and disappears over the non-display period of 14F.

The entanglement prevention display fades in over the fade-in period on the 10th floor after the fade-in period on the alert A, alert B, and alert C after the non-display period on the 35th floor, and is displayed over the display period on the 112th floor. To. After that, the entanglement prevention display fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and is hidden over the non-display period of 14F. The fade-in period of the immersive prevention display is set shorter than that of other warning displays. In this way, the final entanglement prevention display can be made to appear earlier than other alerts, and the display can be sharpened.

As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the attention alert A, the attention alert B, the attention alert C, and the immersive prevention display are faded in in order, displayed in the overlapping period, and then faded out at the same timing. Is done. Although the fade-in period for preventing immersiveness does not overlap with the fade-in period for other alerts, it may be faded in so as to overlap.

In this way, the immersive prevention display and the other warning display can be displayed in the same period, and the display timing of each warning display can be different. According to this, when displaying a plurality of alerts in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once.

In addition, the immersive prevention display can be displayed in the same period as other caution displays, and after the other caution displays are faded in, the immersive prevention display is faded in, and the other caution displays and the immersive prevention display are displayed. After all of the above are available, fade out at the same timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

[Screen during customer waiting demo]
Next, various displays displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a screen during the customer waiting demonstration state. As shown in FIG. 73A, at the start of the customer waiting demonstration state, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 9091 to 9093 are displayed in a mode that results in a misaligned display at the center of the screen. Such a three-symbol display is displayed for 15 seconds. Next, as shown in FIG. 73B, a function introduction movie as a video introducing the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 901 such as how to play and directing is displayed for 39 seconds.

Then, from FIGS. 73 (c) to 73 (f), the three other warning displays 90130 fade in in order from the left. The other alert display 90130 is displayed on the upper center of the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 73 (g) and 73 (h), the sinking prevention image 90131 for preventing the sinking is faded in below the other warning display 90130. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (i), the other warning display 90130 and the entanglement prevention image 90131 fade out at the same timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (j), the screen is hidden for a predetermined period after fading out.

As shown in FIG. 73, the squeeze prevention image 90131, which is a squeeze prevention display, can be displayed in the same period as the other squeeze display 90130, and the display timing of each squeeze display is different. Is performed. In this way, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the information regarding the plurality of warning displays.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the squeeze prevention image 90131, which is a squeeze prevention display, can be displayed in the same period as the other squeeze display 90130, and after the other squeeze display 90130 is faded in. , The entanglement prevention image 90131 is faded in, and after all the entanglement prevention images 90131 and the other warning display 90130 are aligned, the control is performed to fade out at a common timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

[Menu screen]
The menu screen is, for example, a display screen that presents various setting items that can be selected by the player in the effect display device 909 as icon images in the option format (menu format) during the customer waiting demo state. The menu screen has a hierarchical structure. If you select one item from the first screen where the main setting items can be displayed in a list format, detailed settings can be made for each selected item. For example, as the main setting items, it is possible to select a character corresponding to the effect when the game is executed, adjust the volume / light amount, and select the customized effect.

On the menu screen, items can be selected in the vertical and horizontal directions according to the tilt operation of the stick controller 90122 that can be operated in the front-back direction and the left-right direction, and it is selected when the push button 90120 is operated. It is decided on the item that was. To return to the previous screen, the push button 90120 may be operated in the "Back" item.

[Screen during menu operation]
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a screen during menu operation. By operating the push button 90120 from the screen during the customer waiting demo state shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the menu screen 90132 of FIG. 74 (c) is displayed. Although a plurality of selectable items are displayed on the menu screen 90132, the drawings are omitted. An entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed below the menu screen 90132.

Here, the menu screen 90132 is composed of a hierarchical structure of a plurality of images. Then, the immersive prevention image is displayed at any layer of the menu screen 90132. It should be noted that the display mode of the entanglement prevention image may be different for each display layer of the menu screen 90132. In this way, it is possible to display the immersive prevention image in a mode corresponding to the content displayed on the menu screen 90132.

Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the immersive prevention image differs depending on the effect state before and after executing the attention alert. Specifically, as an effect state before executing the attention alert by the entanglement prevention image, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is different depending on the difference of any character on the menu screen 90132. In addition, as will be described later, the display mode of the immersive prevention image at the ending is different due to the difference in the mode during the probability change selected during the big hit game as the effect state after executing the attention reminder by the entanglement prevention image. There is.

On the menu screen in FIG. 74 (c), when the item of character selection is determined by the operation of the stick controller 90122 and the push button 90120, the screen of FIG. 74 (d) is displayed. Here, the default display mode of FIG. 74 (d) is a display mode in which none of the characters is set. As shown in FIG. 74 (d), a screen in which either character X or character Y can be selected as a plurality of types of characters is displayed. The immersive prevention image 90131 is also displayed on the character selection screen. The entanglement prevention image 90131 at this time is the same as the display mode of FIG. 74 (c). Further, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is the default display mode. It should be noted that the display mode of the entanglement prevention image in FIG. 74 (c) and the display mode of the entanglement prevention image in FIG. 74 (d) may be different from each other. The different display modes are, for example, those displayed at different positions, those displayed differently at different positions (those displayed in a reduced size compared to one), and the like.

It is assumed that after FIG. 74 (d), the player operates the push button 90120 and the character X is selected. After that, when the volume / light amount adjustment screen is selected from the various menus, the immersive prevention image 90133 is displayed below the volume / light amount adjustment icon as shown in FIG. 74 (e). The entanglement prevention image 90133 of FIG. 74 (e) is displayed in a mode different from that of the entanglement prevention image 90131 shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d). The volume and the amount of light are determined by operating the push button 90120 after selecting any of the small, medium, and large items by the left and right operation of the stick controller 90122.

Further, it is assumed that after FIG. 74 (d), the player operates the push button 90120 and the character Y is selected. After that, when the volume / light amount adjustment screen is selected from the various menus, as shown in FIG. 74 (f), the immersive prevention image 90134 is displayed below the volume / light amount adjustment icon. The entanglement prevention image 90134 of FIG. 74 (f) is displayed in a mode different from the entanglement prevention image 90131 shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d) and the entanglement prevention image 90133 shown in FIG. 74 (e). The volume and the amount of light are determined by operating the push button 90120 after selecting any of the small, medium, and large items by the left and right operation of the stick controller 90122.

Here, if none of the characters is selected and the default display mode is maintained, the default immersive prevention image 90131 as shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d) is displayed as the volume / light amount adjustment icon. It will continue to be displayed below.

When the menu screen is closed by operating the stick controller 90122 and the push button 90120 from the states shown in FIGS. 74 (e) and 74 (f), the screen shown in FIG. 74 (g) is displayed. In FIG. 74 (g), the entanglement prevention image 90135 is displayed large in the center of the screen of the effect display device 909. In this way, based on ending the display of the menu screen 90132, the entanglement prevention image 90135 is controlled to be displayed first. After that, if the start winning is not generated, the screen in the customer waiting demo state shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed. The immersive prevention image shown in FIG. 74 (g) may be different depending on the type of the selected character. In addition, the display during the jackpot game state may be different depending on the type of character.

Here, if the immersive prevention display is not displayed on the menu screen, if the immersive prevention display is interrupted by opening the menu screen during the customer waiting demo state, the chance of seeing the immersive prevention display is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the chance of seeing the immersive prevention display can be increased by displaying the immersive prevention display in any of the layers of the menu screen. Further, at the end of the menu screen, a large entanglement prevention display is displayed in the center of the screen, so that the player can pay attention to the entanglement prevention display.

In addition, at the end of the menu screen, by controlling to display the immersive prevention display set at the end in the normal customer waiting demo state first, the immersive prevention display is displayed first at the end of the menu screen. You may do so.

In addition, a determination means for determining the selected character in the menu screen may be provided. The character information selected in the menu screen is stored in, for example, the RAM 90103, and based on the information, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control CPU 90101) determines the set character, and a warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness is displayed. The mode may be different.

Further, the mode of the warning display regarding the prevention of immersiveness may be different depending on the operation of the player, but the mode of the warning display regarding the prevention of digging may be different depending on the effect state during the game. For example, a lottery for transition to a specific effect state may be won, and the mode of the warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness may be different depending on the state of the specific effect. More specifically, in a game in which the background changes due to a predetermined lottery or a predetermined number of games, the mode of warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness before the background change and after the background change may be different.

[Screen in power saving mode]
Next, the screen in the power saving mode will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a screen in the power saving mode. After the three symbol displays shown in FIG. 75 (a) and the function introduction movie shown in FIG. 75 (b) are executed as the customer waiting demo state, the attention alert display 90130 shown in FIG. 75 (c) and the immersive prevention image 90131 are displayed. Is displayed. After the demo states shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c) are executed three times, the mode shifts to the power saving mode shown in FIG. 75 (d).

In the power saving mode, the brightness of the screen decreases, but the effect during the customer waiting demonstration state continues. As shown in FIG. 75 (d), the function introduction movie shown in FIG. 75 (e) is executed after the three symbol displays are executed in a state where the brightness of the screen is reduced. During the power saving mode, the warning display 90130 and the immersive prevention image 90131 are not displayed after that, and after the three symbol display in the state where the brightness of the screen shown in FIG. The function introduction movie shown in FIG. 75 (g) is executed, and the following is repeated.

When the power saving mode is terminated by operating the push button 90120 from the state shown in FIG. 75 (g) during the power saving mode, the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 75 (h). In FIG. 75 (h), the brightness of the screen returns to the original brightness, and the entanglement prevention image 90135 is displayed large in the center of the screen of the effect display device 909. After that, if the start winning is not generated, the screen in the customer waiting demo state shown in FIG. 75 (a) is displayed.

[Screen after big hit]
Next, the screen after the big hit is described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a screen after the end of the big hit. FIG. 76A shows a screen during a big hit game. During the jackpot game, a round game of 15 rounds is executed, and after the round game is completed, the ending image 90138 showing the background image of the ending is displayed over the ending period shown in FIG. 76 (b). The ending image 90138 is an ending image in which a character or the like (not shown) is displayed as a background. After the ending image 90138 fades in, the mode information fades in, and then the probability change number information (or time reduction number information) after the big hit fades in. The mode is provided with A mode and B mode, and it is possible to select which mode to use during the jackpot game. Depending on each mode, the effect executed in the probability change state or the time saving state executed after the big hit ends differs.

During the ending period, in addition to the ending image, a prepaid card forget-to-take prevention image 90137 in which balance information is stored is displayed at an inconspicuous position in the lower left corner of the screen, and a dent prevention image 90136 is displayed below the prepaid card. In the ending period, after the ending image and the mode and probability variation number information are displayed, the forget-taking prevention image 90137 and the immersive prevention image 90136 are displayed. Details of the display of the forget-taking prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 (c) to 76 (f). The inconspicuous position is a position deviated from the center such as a position on the edge side of the center of the screen. Further, the content of the characters of the immersive prevention image 90136 during the ending period is the same as the content of the characters of the immersive prevention image 90131 in the customer waiting demo state.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), during the ending period, the prepaid card forget-taking prevention image 90137 fades in before the entanglement prevention image 90136. After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the entanglement prevention image 90136 fades in. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), the forgotten removal prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed for a predetermined time. After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 fade out at the same timing.

In FIGS. 76A to 76F, the ending image 90138, the mode information, the probability variation number information (or the time reduction number information), the forget-taking prevention image 90137, and the immersion prevention image 90136 are faded in in this order, and these images are faded out. After that, the display shown in FIG. 76 (g) is displayed. In FIG. 76 (g), the manufacturer image 90139 as the manufacturer logo display showing the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed below the manufacturer image 90139.

After such a first big hit, as shown in FIG. 76 (h), when the big hit display result is continuously obtained during the probability change state or the time saving state, during the big hit game shown in FIG. 76 (i). Be controlled. In the second consecutive jackpot, it is assumed that the B mode is selected during the jackpot game. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 76 (j), the ending image 90138 is displayed over the ending period. In the ending image 90138, an ending image (not shown) is displayed. Further, after the ending image 90138, the information of the B mode and the information of the probability change number of 100 times (time reduction number) are displayed. However, after the end of the second big hit game, the forgotten prevention image 90137 is not displayed as in the case after the end of the first big hit game, and only the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed small at the lower left of the screen. .. After the second and subsequent jackpot games are completed, both the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the immersive prevention image 90136 may not be displayed.

Then, after the display of the ending image 90138 is erased, the display of FIG. 76 (k) is displayed. In FIG. 76 (k), the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the entanglement prevention image 90140 is displayed below the manufacturer image 90139. The entanglement prevention image 90140 is displayed in a mode different from that of the entanglement prevention image 90131 shown in FIG. 76 (g). The difference in the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is due to the type of mode selected by the player during the jackpot game. The entanglement prevention image 90131 of FIG. 76 (g) and the entanglement prevention image 90140 of FIG. 76 (k) may have a smaller display area than the entanglement prevention image 90131 displayed during the customer waiting demonstration state. ..

In addition, a determination means for determining the mode selected during the jackpot game may be provided. The mode information selected during the jackpot game is stored in, for example, the RAM 90103, and based on the information, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control CPU 90101) determines the set mode, and a warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness is displayed. The mode may be different.

As shown in FIG. 76, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display for entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the immersive prevention image 90137, and the display timing of the entanglement prevention image 90136 and the forgetting prevention image 90137 can be set. Control is performed to display different images. In this way, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the information regarding the plurality of warning displays.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display regarding the entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the forgetting prevention image 90137, and after the forgetting prevention image 90137 is faded in, it is entangled. After the prevention image 90136 is faded in and the forgotten prevention image 90137 and the indentation prevention image 90136 are all available, the control is performed to fade out at a common timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

After the ending image 90138 is displayed, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 may be continuously displayed until the manufacturer image 90139 is erased. In addition, when the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is continuously displayed, after the first big hit, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is displayed from the display of the ending image 90138 to the display of the manufacturer image 90139, but the second consecutive time. After the big hit, the forget-taking prevention image 90137 is displayed while the ending image 90138 is being displayed, but the forget-taking prevention image 90137 may not be displayed when the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed. Further, the entanglement prevention image 90136 may be continuously displayed after the ending image 90138 is displayed until the manufacturer image 90139 is erased. When the entanglement prevention image is continuously displayed, the common entanglement prevention image may be continuously displayed even when the ending image 90138 is switched to the manufacturer image 90139.

Further, as for the various images displayed during the ending period, the next image may be displayed after the display of one image is completely completed. In addition, there may be cases where the timing at which the images fade in partially overlaps and cases where the images do not overlap. Further, the ending image 90138, the mode information, and the probability variation number information may be displayed at the same time, and then the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 may be faded in, and then the sinking prevention image 90136 may be faded in.

[Main effect]
Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73 (h), the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 909 in the customer waiting demonstration state, and in the ending period, it is shown in FIG. 76 (b). As shown, the effect display device 909 is controlled to display the entanglement prevention image 90136 in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen. In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by executing the warning to prevent excessive immersiveness when the big hit is completed.

In this embodiment, it is possible to display the immersive prevention image having the same content of the displayed characters on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period. Then, as shown in FIG. 71, the display period of the entanglement prevention image is set to be shorter in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state. In this way, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the warning when the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (h) and 76 (b), the display area of the entanglement prevention image is smaller in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state. Is set to. In this way, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the warning when the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (h) and 76 (b), the immersive prevention image is displayed to the player in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state. Appears in unobtrusive corners of the screen. In this way, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the warning when the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display for entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the immersive prevention image 90137, and the entanglement prevention image 90136 and the forgetting prevention image 90136. Control is performed so that the display timing is different from that of 90137. In this way, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the information regarding the plurality of warning displays.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display regarding the entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the forgetting prevention image 90137, and the forgetting prevention image 90137 is faded in. After that, the entanglement prevention image 90136 is faded in, and after the entanglement prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are all available, the control is performed to fade out at a common timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 76, the entanglement prevention image 90131 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed over the period in which the ending image 90138 and the manufacturer image 90139 are displayed during the ending period. Will be done. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ending period from being extended by displaying all the information separately, and to appropriately execute a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in a limited period after the jackpot game state ends. it can.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 76, the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed after the mode information and the probability variation number information are displayed. In this way, by displaying the information about the game first, the player can pay attention to the display, and it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of immersiveness in the period after the jackpot game state ends. it can.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 (g), a manufacturer image 90139 showing the manufacturer of the game machine is displayed after the ending image 90138, and a dent prevention image 90131 is displayed below the ending image 90138. In this way, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement while displaying the manufacturer information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the display of the forgotten prevention image 90137 ends in connection with fading in the entanglement prevention image 90136 after the forgetting prevention image 90137 and switching to the manufacturer image 90139. However, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is continuously displayed until the display of the manufacturer image 90139 is completed. In this way, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

In this embodiment, when the big hits are continuous as shown in FIGS. 71 and 76 (j), the forget-taking prevention image 90137 is displayed only at the time of the first big hit, but the immersive prevention image 90136 is a big hit. Control is performed to display each time. According to this, it is possible to preferably execute the attention alert when the big hit game state is continuously controlled.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 (e) and 74 (f), the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the difference of any character on the menu screen 90132. In this way, the attention can be appropriately executed by considering the relationship between the effect state before the attention is executed and the execution mode of the attention regarding the prevention of immersiveness.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 (b) and 76 (k), the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the mode during the probability change during the big hit game. In this way, the attention can be appropriately executed by considering the relationship between the effect state after the attention is executed and the execution mode of the attention regarding the prevention of immersiveness.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the character and the mode set according to the operation of the stick controller 90122 and the push button 90120. In this way, it is possible to execute a suitable alert according to the preference of the player.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the mode during the probability change selected during the jackpot game. In this way, it is possible to execute a suitable alert according to the preference of the player. In addition, as in the second embodiment described later, it may be possible to select a musical piece (a video corresponding to the musical piece) during the big hit. In such a case, the display mode of the immersive prevention image may be different depending on the music (the image corresponding to the music) selected during the big hit.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image may be different depending on the character set when the jackpot game state is controlled. In this way, it is possible to execute a suitable alert according to the preference of the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the execution time until the immersive prevention image is displayed is controlled to be different between when the power failure is restored and when the initialization is performed. More specifically, during the customer-waiting demonstration game, the time until the display of the immersive prevention image is started differs depending on whether the power failure is restored or initialized. In this way, it is possible to call attention to the prevention of sinking at an appropriate timing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the volume / light amount adjustment icon. In this way, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the menu screen 90132 has a hierarchical structure consisting of a plurality of images. Then, the entanglement prevention image is controlled so as to be displayed in any layer of the menu screen 90132. In this way, it is possible to suitably carry out a warning regarding prevention of entanglement.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 (g), the entanglement prevention image 90135 is controlled to be displayed first based on the end of the display of the menu screen 90132. In this way, the player does not overlook the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement, and the alert can be suitably executed according to the situation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 75, when the brightness reduction image in which the screen brightness is reduced is displayed on the effect display device 909 during the power saving mode, the immersive prevention image is not displayed. Is controlled by. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the motivation to move from being significantly reduced during the power saving mode by preventing the immersive prevention image from being further displayed during the power saving mode.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the entanglement prevention image 90135 is controlled to be displayed first based on the termination of the power saving mode. In this way, the player does not overlook the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement, and the alert can be suitably executed according to the situation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the function introduction movie can be displayed on the effect display device 909 during the customer waiting demo state. Then, as shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 75 (g), in the power saving mode, a function introduction movie other than the immersive prevention image can be displayed on the effect display device 909. In this way, it is possible to prevent the motivation to move from being significantly reduced during the power saving mode.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the processing during the jackpot effect in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the case where the music can be selected during the big hit will be described. In the second embodiment, a selection effect of selecting one of a plurality of songs from a plurality of songs is executed based on the operation of the player during the jackpot. In the second embodiment, when the stick controller 90122 or the push button 90120 is operated as the operating means, the movement of the player is detected by the sensor provided inside, and the detection signal is transmitted to the effect control board 9080. The effect based on the operation is executed. As the selection effect, one of a plurality of types of images may be selected during the jackpot, or one of the modes may be selected from a plurality of types of modes.

FIG. 77 is an effect drawing showing an effect executed during the jackpot. The production during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 77. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the music selection screen is displayed at the start of the big hit. The music selection screen at the start of this big hit is displayed regardless of the operation of the player. In the area on the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 909, items corresponding to the songs A to D are displayed. The first selection image 90170 corresponding to the music A, the second selection image 90171 corresponding to the music B, the third selection image 90172 corresponding to the music C, and the fourth selection image 90173 corresponding to the music D are from above. They are displayed side by side in order. Further, around the first selected image 90170, it is indicated by a bordered display that an item corresponding to the image is selected.

The video area 90175 is displayed on the right side of the first-selected images 90170 to 90173. Images corresponding to the songs A to D flow in the image area 90175. At the start of the jackpot, with the first-selected image 90170 selected, a video corresponding to the music A flows in the video area 90175 from a specific unit (for example, a chorus portion where the music is heard). Further, at the start of the jackpot, the music corresponding to the first selected music A is played from the specific portion (chorus portion). Here, the specific part may be a part other than the chorus part, which is the place where the music is heard. For example, it may be the main part of the music, which is the exciting part of the music but different from the chorus part. The video or sound corresponding to the music may be reproduced from the beginning of the music.

Further, on the lower left side of the screen of the effect display device 909, a selection operation image 90176 that prompts a music selection operation imitating a stick controller is displayed. Further, in the center of the lower part of the screen, a decision image 90177 that prompts a music decision operation imitating a push button is displayed. Further, on the right side of the lower part of the screen, an image of "7" indicating which symbol the current jackpot is based on is displayed. In addition, the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper left side of the screen, and an image of a right-handed instruction prompting the player to play a game aiming at the area on the right side is displayed on the upper right side of the screen.

The state when the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 77 (a) and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). When the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 77 (a) and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a bordered state. Further, the video corresponding to the music B flows from the specific portion (chorus portion) to the video area 90175, and the music corresponding to the music B is reproduced from the specific portion (chorus portion).

The case where the music A is determined from the state of FIG. 77 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (c). When the music A is determined in the music selection at the start of the big hit, the video corresponding to the music A is played from the beginning in the video area 90175 moved to the center of the screen as the music determination screen at the start of the big hit. Also, the music A is played from the beginning. By the determination operation, the display of the selection operation image 90176 and the determination image 90177 is erased. Here, the music selection operation at the start of the big hit can be performed during the period from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. If neither the selection operation nor the determination operation is performed by the end of the second round, the video and sound corresponding to the initially set music A will be played from the end of the second round. Further, when only the selection operation is executed and the two rounds are completed without the determination operation being executed, the video and sound of the music corresponding to the item selected by the selection operation are output.

From the state of FIG. 77 (c), at the start of the third round, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the video corresponding to the music A is continuously played in the video area 90175 in the center of the screen, and the sound corresponding to the music A is output. Will be done. At the start of the third round, the selection operation image 90176 is displayed again at the bottom of the screen. Then, when the player operates the stick controller, the music selection screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 77 (e). In this way, the second music selection screen is displayed based on the operation of the player. In the first music selection screen, the valid period of the operation is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and in the second music selection screen, the valid period of the operation is from the start of the third round to the final. It is set up to a round (16 rounds). It should be noted that these periods may be set in any way, the selectable period may be three or more times, and the selection operation may not be performed during any of the rounds.

On the music selection screen of FIG. 77 (e), as compared with the music selection screen at the start of the big hit of FIG. 77 (a), the character of the first selection image 90170 corresponding to the item of music A is "A". It has been changed from the indicated character to the "back" character. Also, the currently selected "back" first-selected image 90170 is bordered and displayed. Further, from the state of FIG. 77 (d), the video and sound corresponding to the music A are continuously flowing. In addition, the determined image 90177 is newly displayed. From such a state, when the stick controller is operated and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a bordered state as shown in FIG. 77 (f). Further, the video corresponding to the music B flows in the video area 90175 from the chorus portion. However, even if such a selection operation is performed, the sound of the music A is still output.

When the music A is selected from the state of FIG. 77 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 77 (g). In FIG. 77 (g), since the item of the music A corresponding to the first selection image 90170 indicated by “return” in FIG. 77 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to A is continuously reproduced in the video area 90175. .. In addition, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. On the other hand, when the music B is selected from the state of FIG. 77 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 77 (h). In FIG. 77 (h), since the item of the music B corresponding to the second selection image 90171 shown by “B” in FIG. 77 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to B is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175. .. Also, the sound of music B is reproduced from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), at the start of the jackpot, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the player can change the item selected by the selection operation. In addition, by the selection operation, the music and the video corresponding to the selected item are output. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "returning" even when the item corresponding to the music A is being executed. In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is played from the beginning.

In this way, it is possible to confirm what is in the other selection items while playing the music corresponding to the music A. Then, even if the music A is re-determined, the music A is not played from the beginning and continues to flow from the middle. Therefore, even if the selected music is selected again, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. More specifically, when a song that has already been selected is selected again, it may be annoying if the song is played from the beginning, which may reduce the interest. However, by the above processing, even when the selected music is selected again, it is possible to prevent the music from being played from the beginning, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77, the selection effect of selecting an item can be executed during the jackpot state. Therefore, even when the selected song is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the big hit state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the music selection effect for selecting a musical piece includes a selection effect at the start of a round executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of a big hit and as shown in FIG. 77 (d). Includes a selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation when the three rounds are disclosed. In this way, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the jackpot state, the player's preference such as selecting a song in the second selection effect without selecting a song in the first selection effect is met. The selection effect can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77, the first selection effect at the start of the round is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and the second selection effect at the start of the third round is at the start of the third round. It is set from to the final round. Therefore, by prolonging the executable period of the second selection effect to be executed based on the player's operation, it is possible to deal with various types of players such as the fact that the first selection operation could not be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77, in a music piece that can be played back, as shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, in the selection effect at the start of the round, items are set based on the operation of the player. When changed, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 77 (e) and 77 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is It does not change. In this way, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the frequent switching of the music.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the items corresponding to the currently executed music is different from the display of "A" in the selection effect at the start of the round. Display with "Back". In this way, it is possible to show the player in an easy-to-understand manner which song is currently playing.

It should be noted that the pending continuous effect may be executed for the above-mentioned selection effect. For example, it is assumed that the hold continuous production can be executed at any of a plurality of timings in the round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. In this way, the player can be surprised at the first selection effect of selecting the music at the start of the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, if there is no determination operation of the player until the end of the second round, the hold continuous production may be executed at the timing when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command at the end of the second round. .. Further, instead of the selection effect at the start of the big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing operated by the player in the second selection effect at the start of the third round. If the player does not perform the selection operation from the selection effect at the start of the third round to the final round, even if the hold continuous effect is executed at the timing after the executable period of the selection effect ends. Good.

Further, regarding the jackpot state as an advantageous state, a normal jackpot as a first advantageous state and a probabilistic jackpot as a second advantageous state which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state may be provided. Then, a probabilistic promotion effect that promotes to a probabilistic jackpot during a normal jackpot may be executed. For example, it is assumed that the probabilistic promotion effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings in the round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. In this way, the player can be surprised at the selection effect of selecting the music at the start of the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the case of the probabilistic promotion effect, the execution timing may be determined at the start of the big hit. Then, as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, there may be a plurality of timings at the time of selecting a song, at the result of the fanning effect of the fixed probabilistic promotion effect of 11R to 13, and at the ending (after the end of 16R). Good. When the timing at the time of selecting a song is determined by a predetermined random number lottery from these three patterns, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed in the selection effect of selecting the song at the start of the big hit.

Further, a plurality of jackpots having different rounds may be provided, and the present invention may be applied to a round promotion effect in which a jackpot with a small number of rounds is promoted to a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

Further, depending on the type of the selected music, the display mode of the immersive prevention image may be different in the ending period after the end of the big hit.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a music selection process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot music selection process is executed in the effect control process process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101). In the big hit music selection process, when it is a big hit, the process for the effect shown in FIG. 77 is executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

In the jackpot music selection process, the effect control CPU 90101 first determines whether or not the current round is in the period of 1R to 2R (S90601). When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that the current round is in the period of 1R to 2R (Y in S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the initial music determination flag is set (S90602). When the initial music determination flag is set (Y in S90602), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90602, when the initial music determination flag is not set (N in S90602), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the music change period (S90603), and determines that it is the music change period. In the case (Y in S90603), it is determined whether or not there is a selection operation (S90604). On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 determines that it is not the music change period (N in S90603), it stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90604, when it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90604), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the music from the chorus according to the music selection (S90605). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90604), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90606 after S90605, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not there is a determination operation (S90606). When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90606), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the determined music from the beginning (S90607). Next, the initial music determination flag is set (S90608), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90606), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90601, when it is determined that the current round is not in the period of 1R to 2R, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the final music determination flag is set (S90610). When the final music determination flag is set (Y in S90610), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final music determination flag is not set (N in S90610), the effect control CPU 90101 displays the music change screen (S90611). Next, it is determined whether or not the screen change flag is set (S90612).

In S90612, when the effect control CPU 90101 determines that the screen change flag is not set (N in S90612), it determines whether or not there is a change operation (S90613). When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that there is no change operation (N in S90613), the video and music corresponding to the initial music are played as they are (S90616), and various data are stored in the storage area (S90609). End the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 determines that there is a change operation (Y in S90613), the screen flag is set (S90614), and the music selection screen in which the initial music is "returned" is displayed (S90615). , S90617. In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is set (Y in S90612), the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to S90617 without performing the processing of S90613 to S90615.

In S90617, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the music change period. When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that it is the music change period (Y in S90617), it determines whether or not there is a selection operation (S90618). In S90617, when it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that there is a selection operation (Y in S90618), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video corresponding to the selected music from the chorus and plays the initial music as it is (S90619). Then, it shifts to S90620. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90618), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90620, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not there is a determination operation. When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90620), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the initial music has been determined (S90621). In S90620, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90620), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. In S90621, when the initial music is determined (Y in S90621), the video corresponding to the initial music is played continuously and the initial music is played as it is (S90622). Next, the final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 is not determined to be the initial music (N in S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video corresponding to the changed music from the beginning and reproduces the changed music from the beginning (S90623). Next, the final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends.

The music may be changed many times between the 3Rs and the final round. Specifically, the processes of S90610 and S90624 may not be executed.

[Modification example, etc.]
Next, modified examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.

In the above-described embodiment, the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement may be executed by the output of sound or the emission of light. Then, not only the display mode but also the sound and light modes may be different depending on the situation in which the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement is executed. The mode of only sound and light may be changed without changing the display, or the mode of combination of display and light may be changed although the sound is the same.

In the above-described embodiment, the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement may be executed at a timing other than the timing of the customer waiting demonstration state or the jackpot game state. For example, a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness may be executed during the variable display. In such a case, a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness may be issued over a plurality of fluctuations, or may be issued within a single fluctuation. In addition, the timing for issuing a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness may be the timing of the first rotation after the end of the time reduction, the first timing in the morning when the power is turned on, or the timing when the fluctuation display is executed 1000 times. ..

In the above-described embodiment, it may be possible to change the frequency, timing, scene, etc. of executing the caution regarding the prevention of entanglement on the player side or the store side. For example, a player who does not play a game until he / she is originally too enthusiastic may feel uncomfortable with the alert regarding prevention of immersiveness. Therefore, the player may be able to restrict the execution of the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement from the menu screen by using an operation means such as the push button 90120.

In the above-described embodiment, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness can be displayed in the same display period as the other warning display, and after the other warning display is faded in, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness is faded in. The display was controlled. However, it is also possible to fade in another warning display after the warning display related to prevention of immersiveness is faded in first. In this way, it is possible to extend the display period of the warning display regarding the prevention of immersiveness.

In the above-described embodiment, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness can be displayed in the same display period as the other warning display, and after the other warning display is faded in, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness is faded in. The display was controlled. However, after the warning display for preventing entanglement and the other warning display are faded in at the same timing, one of the displays may be faded out first.

In the above-described embodiment, the warning display for preventing entanglement and other warning displays may be faded in at the same timing and then faded out at the same timing. In addition, the display mode may be different depending on whether the warning display for preventing entanglement and another warning display are faded in (or faded out) at the same time and faded in (or faded out) at different timings. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed after the ending image 90138 and the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed at the end of the jackpot gaming state has been described. Then, after the entanglement prevention image 90136 and the entanglement prevention image 90137 were once erased, the entanglement prevention image 90131 together with the manufacturer image 90139 was displayed again. However, the entanglement prevention image displayed when the ending image 90138 is displayed may continue to be displayed until the display of the manufacturer image 90139 is completed. Specifically, the display of the ending image 90138 and the image for preventing forgetting to take 90137 may be switched to the display of the manufacturer image 90139 while the immersive prevention image is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed after the ending image 90138 and the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed at the end of the jackpot gaming state has been described. However, after displaying the ending image 90138 at the end of the jackpot game state, the manufacturer image 90139 may be displayed, and then the forgotten removal prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 may be displayed. Then, when the big hits are continuous, the manufacturer image 90139 may be displayed in the second and subsequent big hits, and then the forget-taking prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 may not be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state has been described. However, the display period of the immersive prevention image may be shorter in the customer waiting demo state than in the ending period after the end of the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display by lengthening the display period during the ending period.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display area of the entanglement prevention image is smaller in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state has been described. However, the display area of the entanglement prevention image may be smaller in the customer waiting demo state than in the ending period after the big hit. In this way, the warning display can be suitably executed during the ending period.

In the above-described embodiment, the same material may be used as the material for the immersive prevention image in the customer waiting demonstration state and in the ending period after the end of the big hit. In this way, the data capacity can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display position of the entanglement prevention image is displayed at a position that is less conspicuous during the ending period after the end of the jackpot than in the customer waiting demonstration state has been described. However, the display position of the entanglement prevention image may be displayed in a less conspicuous position in the customer waiting demo state than in the ending period after the end of the big hit. In this way, the display position during the ending period can be made conspicuous, and the warning display can be preferably executed.

In the above-described embodiment, during the customer waiting demonstration state, a warning regarding prevention of entanglement may always be executed at the corner of the screen. Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the start-up prize is generated and the demonstration state is completed, the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement may be immediately terminated, or the reminder regarding the prevention of immersion for a predetermined period after the start-up prize is generated may be terminated. May be terminated after executing.

In the above-described embodiment, another warning display as shown in FIG. 73 (h) may be executed during the ending period of the jackpot. Even in such a case, the ending video is first displayed as the ending image, the information about the game such as the mode display and the number of probability changes (or the number of time reductions) after the big hit is displayed, and then other warning displays are displayed. You can do it. Further, the other warning display may be displayed after the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 76, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the immersive prevention image 90136 are displayed in the first big hit, and the forgotten to take in the second and subsequent big hits in a row. The case where the prevention image 90137 is not displayed and only the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed has been described. However, the mode of alerting is not different between the first jackpot and the second and subsequent jackpots, and the mode of alerting may be different between the second jackpot and the third and subsequent jackpots, and the jackpot is predetermined. The mode of alerting may be different on the condition that the number of times is continuous. For example, the forgotten prevention image 90137 is not displayed until the jackpot is 5 times, and only the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed. You may limit it so that it is not done.

In the above-described embodiment, a sudden probability change jackpot may be provided, which is controlled in the probability change state but cannot obtain a ball. Then, when the probability change jackpot is suddenly controlled, the entanglement prevention image 90136 may not be displayed together with the forget-taking prevention image 90137 regardless of the first jackpot or the continuous jackpot. As described above, when the unfavorable jackpot is won, the mode may be different from that when the advantageous jackpot is won.

In the above-described embodiment, the forgotten prevention image 90137 is not displayed at the time of the probability variation jackpot, only the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed, and the immersive prevention image 90137 is displayed at the time of the normal jackpot, and the immersive prevention image 90136 May be displayed. In this way, the mode of alerting may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

In the above-described embodiment, the immersive prevention image having the same displayed character content can be displayed on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period. However, the immersive prevention image is not limited to the one in which the contents of the characters are exactly the same, and may be in another mode as long as the expressions are similar and the same information is transmitted.

In the above-described embodiment, the execution mode of calling attention regarding the prevention of immersiveness on the menu screen differs depending on the type of character selected before being controlled to the jackpot game state. However, depending on the type of character selected before being controlled to the jackpot game state, the execution mode of alerting regarding prevention of immersiveness in the ending period after the end of the jackpot game state may be different. In addition, a plurality of types of production modes can be set in the normal game state, and the execution mode of alerting regarding prevention of immersiveness during the customer waiting demo state or the ending period may be different depending on the set mode. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image as a reminder and the sound output corresponding to the entanglement prevention display may be included. Then, a common image may be displayed as the entanglement prevention image depending on the mode selected by the player, and different sounds may be output as the sound corresponding to the entanglement prevention display.

In the above-described embodiment, a switch that can set whether or not to display the immersive prevention image may be provided. For example, such a switch may be provided at a predetermined position on the effect control board 9080. Then, when the power is turned on with the switch turned on, it is sufficient to set whether or not to execute the power saving mode and set whether or not to display the immersive prevention image. In this way, it is possible for the amusement store side to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement. In addition to the presence or absence of the display of the entanglement prevention image, an operation means capable of changing the display size and the display position of the entanglement prevention image may be separately provided.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, at the time of initialization, the screen from the head of the three symbol display, which is the first timing of the customer waiting demo state, is displayed, and at the time of power failure recovery, the customer waiting demo state is in progress. The case where it is displayed from the screen of the timing when the other warning display and the immersive prevention display are executed, which is the timing of. However, it suffices that the timing for executing the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement is different between the time of initialization and the time of recovery from the power failure, and may be different timings. For example, the normal background may be displayed for about 15 seconds at the time of initialization, then the customer waiting demo state may be started, and the immersive prevention display may be executed at the final timing. Further, at the time of recovery from a power failure, the immersive prevention display may be executed without executing the other warning display.

In the above-described embodiment, the immersive prevention display may be displayed larger in the center of the screen in the customer waiting demo state of FIG. 73 than in the display of the menu screen of FIG. 74. In this way, it is possible to suitably carry out a warning regarding prevention of entanglement according to the situation. It should be noted that the display area of the immersive prevention display may be larger when the menu screen is displayed than when the customer waiting demo state is displayed. Further, the visibility from the player may be different due to the difference in the display position of the immersive prevention display between the customer waiting demo state and the display of the menu screen.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during the customer waiting demonstration state is continued even during the power saving mode in which the screen brightness is reduced. However, during the power saving mode, the effect during the customer waiting demo state may not be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the immersive prevention image may be always displayed during the customer waiting demonstration state. In such a case, the display of the entanglement prevention image may be erased in the power saving mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the motivation to move from being significantly reduced during the power saving mode by preventing the immersive prevention image from being further displayed during the power saving mode.

In the above-described embodiment, the music change is described as a selection effect that the player can select and operate. However, the effect changed by the selected effect may be something other than a musical piece. For example, the effect changed by the selection effect may be a background change effect, a video change effect, a character change effect, or the like. In such a case, if what was once selected is selected again, the effect may be taken over. Specifically, in a game machine that can reserve to change the background by operating a push button, I tried to change the background, but when I wanted to keep the current background, the production with the current background is It may be continued (for example, music in the current background is continuously played).

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music selection effect can be executed during the jackpot has been described. However, the music selection effect may be executed during the rush hour, or may be executed in the non-KT state. In such a case, a plurality of periods during which the selection effect can be executed are provided, and the music is divided into a period when the number of fluctuations is small (1 to 10 times) and a period when the number of fluctuations is large (70 to 100 times). The selection effect of may be executed. In addition, the selection effect may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration. For example, the menu screen can be opened by operating the push button during the customer waiting demonstration, and the volume and light amount of the pachinko machine can be adjusted and the execution frequency of the production can be changed in the menu screen. Good.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the case where the currently executed item is changed to the character “return” has been described. However, the color and shape of the item currently being executed may be different instead of changing to characters.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music is reproduced from the chorus portion of the music has been described. Depending on the music, it may be reproduced from a part other than "rust" (such as a verse), or the part reproduced by the music may be different.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker opening is repeated, that is, a round gaming period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeating the attacker opening (round game period), and an ending effect period executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state and notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state to notify the end of the jackpot game state.

In the above-mentioned various control of music selection, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop button is operated by the player. If the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped, it can be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. In the slot machine, the immersive prevention display may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration state and when the advantageous state such as the big bonus or AT for the player ends. Further, in the slot machine, a music selection or determination operation may be executed by a push button or a cross key provided on the housing.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

As an embodiment of this, a game machine in which the game medium is paid out to the player's hand when a prize is generated has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid to the player's hand when a prize is generated. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without giving out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case has been shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols or effect symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is limited to such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% has been described as a specific example as the “ratio (ratio, probability)”. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , It also includes the case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0%.

In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. An example of probabilistic state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 9020, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold memory display 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU
80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 909 Production display device 90100 Production control microcomputer 90560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can execute games,
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed during the execution of the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. A variable display execution means that can execute the other variable display of information,
Advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the derivation display of the specific display result as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. When,
Based on the fact that the predetermined display result is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, it is advantageous for the player and the predetermined state is different from the advantageous state. Controllable predetermined state control means and
A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the second identification information is provided.
The notification effect executing means is
In the normal state, the notification effect can be executed based on the start of the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information from which the specific display result is derived and displayed.
In the normal state, when the variable display of the first identification information is not started during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information from which the specific display result is derived and displayed, the execution of the notification effect can be restricted.
further,
Equipped with an alerting means that can execute alerting to prevent immersiveness in the game
The alerting means is
At least in the non-gaming state and when the advantageous state ends, it is possible to call attention to the prevention of immersiveness.
A gaming machine characterized in that a warning regarding prevention of entanglement is executed in different modes between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state.